6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Disclaimer of liability
We have checked the text of this manual against the hardware
and software described. However, deviations from the descrip-
tion cannot be completely ruled out, so that no liability can be ac-
cepted for any errors or omissions contained in the information
given.
The information in this manual is checked periodically, and nec-
essary corrections will be included in future editions. We appre-
ciate any suggested improvements.
We reserve the right to make technical improvements without
notice.
Copyright
Copyright © Siemens AG 2004. All rights reserved.
Dissemination or reproduction of this document, or evaluation
and communication of its contents, is not authorized except
where expressly permitted. Violations are liable for damages. All
rights reserved, particularly for the purposes of patent application
or trademark registration.
Registered Trademarks
SIPROTEC, SINAUT, SICAM and DIGSI are registered trade-
marks of SIEMENS AG. Other designations in this manual may
be trademarks that if used by third parties for their own purposes
may violate the rights of the owner.
Release 4.60.02
36MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Preface
Purpose of this
Manual
This manual describes the functions, operation, installation, and commissioning of the
device 6MD63. In particular, one will find:
• Information regarding the configuration of the device extent and descriptions of
device functions and settings → Chapter 2;
• Instructions for mounting and commissioning → Chapter 3,
• Compilation of technical data→ Chapter 4,
• As well as a compilation of the most significant data for experienced users in Ap-
pendix A.
General information about design, configuration, and operation of SIPROTEC®4
devices is laid down in the SIPROTEC® System Description /1/.
Target Audience Protection engineers, commissioning engineers, personnel concerned with adjust-
ment, checking, and service of selective protective equipment, automatic and control
facilities, and personnel of electrical facilities and power plants.
Applicability of this
Manual
This manual is valid for: SIPROTEC®4 Input / Output Unit with Local Control 6MD63;
firmware version V4.6.
Indication of
Conformity
This product is UL-certified according to the Technical Data:
Additional Support Should further information on the System SIPROTEC® 4 be desired or should partic-
ular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser's purpose, the
matter should be referred to the local Siemens representative.
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Commu-
nities on the approximation of the laws of the member states relating to electro-
magnetic compatibility (EMC Council Directive 89/336/EEC) and concerning elec-
trical equipment for use within certain voltage limits (Low-voltage Directive
73/23/EEC).
This conformity is proved by tests conducted by Siemens AG in accordance with
Article 10 of the Council Directive in agreement with the generic standards EN
50081 and EN 61000-6-2 for EMC directive
and with the standard EN 60255–6 for the low-voltage directive. This device was
designed and produced for industrial use according to the EMC standard.
The product conforms with the international standard of the series IEC 60255 and
the German standard VDE 0435.
Preface
46MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Training Courses Individual course offerings may be found in our Training Catalogue, or questions may
be directed to our training centre in Nuremberg.
WARNING!
When operating an electrical device, certain parts of the device inevitably have dan-
gerous voltages.
Failure to observe these precautions can result in death, personal injury, or serious
material damage.
Only qualified personnel shall work on and around this equipment. It must be thor-
oughly familiar with all warnings and safety notices of this manual as well as with the
applicable safety regulations.
The successful and safe operation of this device is dependent on proper handling, in-
stallation, operation, and maintenance by qualified personnel under observance of all
warnings and hints contained in this manual. In particular the general erection and
safety regulations (e.g. IEC, DIN, VDE, EN or other national and international stan-
dards) regarding the correct use of hoisting gear must be observed.
Instructions and
Warnings
The warnings and notes contained in this manual serve for your own safety and for
an appropriate lifetime of the device. Please observe them!
The following warning terms and standard definitions are used:
DANGER!
indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage will
result if proper precautions are not taken.
Warning
indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can
result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
indicates that minor personal injury or property damage can result if proper precau-
tions are not taken. This particularly applies to damage on or in the device itself and
consequential damage thereof.
Note
indicates information about the device or respective part of the instruction manual
which is essential to highlight.
Definition QUALIFIED PERSONNEL
For the purpose of this instruction manual and product labels, a qualified person is
one who is familiar with the installation, construction and operation of the equipment
and the hazards involved. In addition, he has the following qualifications:
• Is trained and authorized to energize, de-energize, clear, ground and tag circuits
and equipment in accordance with established safety practices.
• Is trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment in accordance with
established safety practices.
• Is trained in rendering first aid.
Preface
5
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Deviations may be permitted in drawings and tables when the type of designator can
be obviously derived from the illustration.
The following symbols are used in drawings:
device-internal logical input signal
device-internal logical output signal
internal input signal of an analog quantity
external binary input signal with number (binary input,
input indication)
external binary output signal with number (device indi-
cation)
external binary output signal with number (device indi-
cation) used as input signal
Example of a parameter switch designated FUNC-
TION with address 1234 and the possible settings ON
and OFF
Typographic and
Symbol Conventions
To designate terms which refer in the text to information of the device or for the
device, the following fonts are used:
Parameter names
Designators of configuration or function parameters which may appear word-for-
word in the display of the device or on the screen of a personal computer (with op-
eration software DIGSI®), are marked in bold letters of a monospace type style. This
also applies to header bars for selection menus.
3.280 feet (1,234A)
Parameter addresses have the same character style as parameter names. Param-
eter addresses contain the suffix A in the overview tables if the parameter can only
be set in DIGSI ® via the option Display additional settings.
Parameter Conditions
possible settings of text parameters, which may appear word-for-word in the display
of the device or on the screen of a personal computer (with operation software DIG-
SI®), are additionally written in italics. This also applies to header bars for selection
menus.
“Annunciations”
Designators for information, which may be output by the relay or required from other
devices or from the switch gear, are marked in a monospace type style in quotation
marks.
Preface
66MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Besides these, graphical symbols are used according to IEC 60617-12 and IEC
60617-13 or symbols derived from these standards. Some of the most frequently used
are listed below:
Input signal of an analogue quantity
OR gate
AND gate
Exclusive OR gate (antivalence): output is active, if
only one of the inputs is active
Coincidence gate (equivalence): output is active, if
both inputs are active or inactive at the same time
Dynamic inputs (edge-triggered) above with positive,
below with negative edge
Formation of one analog output signal from a number
of analog input signals
Limit stage with setting address and parameter desig-
nator (name)
Timer (pickup delay T, example adjustable) with setting
address and parameter designator (name)
Timer (dropout delay T, example non-adjustable)
Dynamic triggered pulse timer T (monoflop)
Static memory (RS-flipflop) with setting input (S), re-
setting input (R), output (Q) and inverted output (Q)
■
76MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Contents
1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.1 Overall Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
1.2 Application Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
1.3 Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2 Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.1.1 Functional Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.1.1.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.1.1.2 Setting Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.1.1.3 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.1.2 Power System Data 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.1.2.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.1.2.2 Setting Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.1.2.3 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2.1.2.4 Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2.1.3 Power System Data 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2.1.3.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2.1.3.2 Setting Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2.1.3.3 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2.1.3.4 Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
2.1.4 Ethernet EN100-Modul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
2.1.4.1 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
2.1.4.2 Setting Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
2.1.4.3 Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
2.2 Monitoring Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2.2.1 Measurement Supervision. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2.2.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2.2.1.2 Hardware Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2.2.1.3 Software Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2.2.1.4 Monitoring of the Transformer Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2.2.1.5 Setting Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
2.2.1.6 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
2.2.1.7 Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
2.2.2 Malfunction Responses of the Monitoring Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
2.2.2.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Contents
86MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
2.3 Temperature Detection via RTD Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
2.3.1 Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
2.3.2 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
2.3.3 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
2.3.4 Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
2.4 Phase Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
2.4.1 Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
2.4.2 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
2.5 Command Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
2.5.1 Control Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
2.5.1.1 Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
2.5.1.2 Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
2.5.2 Types of Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
2.5.2.1 Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
2.5.3 Command Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
2.5.3.1 Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
2.5.4 Interlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
2.5.4.1 Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
2.5.5 Command Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
2.5.5.1 Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Contents
9
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
2.6 Auxiliary Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
2.6.1 Message Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
2.6.1.1 LED Display and Binary Outputs (Output relays) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
2.6.1.2 Information on the Integrated Display (LCD) or Personal Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
2.6.1.3 Information to a Substation Control Centre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
2.6.2 Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
2.6.2.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
2.6.2.2 Setting Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
2.6.2.3 Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
2.6.3 Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
2.6.3.1 Display of Measured Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
2.6.3.2 Inversion of Measured Power Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
2.6.3.3 Transfer of Measured Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
2.6.3.4 Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
2.6.4 Average Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
2.6.4.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
2.6.4.2 Setting Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
2.6.4.3 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
2.6.4.4 Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
2.6.5 Min/Max Measurement Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
2.6.5.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
2.6.5.2 Setting Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
2.6.5.3 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
2.6.5.4 Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
2.6.6 Set Points for Measured Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
2.6.6.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
2.6.6.2 Setting Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
2.6.6.3 Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
2.6.7 Set Points for Statistic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
2.6.7.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
2.6.7.2 Setting Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
2.6.7.3 Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
2.6.8 Energy Metering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
2.6.8.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
2.6.8.2 Setting Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
2.6.8.3 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
2.6.8.4 Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
2.6.9 Commissioning Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
2.6.9.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Contents
10 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
3 Mounting and Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
3.1 Mounting and Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
3.1.1 Configuration Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
3.1.2 Hardware Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
3.1.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
3.1.2.2 Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
3.1.2.3 Switching Elements on the Printed Circuit Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
3.1.2.4 Interface Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
3.1.2.5 Reassembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
3.1.3 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
3.1.3.1 Panel Flush Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
3.1.3.2 Rack Mounting and Cubicle Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
3.1.3.3 Panel Surface Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
3.1.3.4 Mounting with Detached Operator Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
3.1.3.5 Mounting without Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
3.2 Checking Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
3.2.1 Checking Data Connections of Serial Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
3.2.2 Checking Power Plant Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
3.3 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
3.3.1 Test Mode and Transmission Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
3.3.2 Testing System Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
3.3.3 Checking the Status of Binary Inputs and Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
3.3.4 Testing User-Defined Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
3.3.5 Current, Voltage, and Phase Rotation Testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
3.3.6 Direction Test with Load Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
3.3.7 Checking the Temperature Measurement via RTD-Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
3.3.8 Trip/Close Tests for the Configured Operating Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
3.4 Final Preparation of the Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
4 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
4.1 General Device Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
4.1.1 Analog Inputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
4.1.2 Power Supply Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
4.1.3 Binary Inputs and Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
4.1.4 Communication Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
4.1.5 Electrical Tests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
4.1.6 Mechanical Stress Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
4.1.7 Climatic Stress Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
4.1.8 Service Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
4.1.9 Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
4.1.10 Construction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
4.2 Breaker Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
4.3 RTD Boxes for Overload Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Contents
11
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
4.4 User-Defined Functions (CFC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
4.5 Additional Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
4.6 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
4.6.1 Panel Flush and Cubicle Mounting (Housing Size 1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
4.6.2 Panel Flush and Cubicle Mounting (Housing Size 1/1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
4.6.3 Panel Surface Mounting (Housing Size 1/2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
4.6.4 Panel Surface Mounting (Housing Size 1/1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
4.6.5 Panel Surface Mounting with Detached Operator Panel or without Operator Panel (Housing
Size 1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
4.6.6 Panel Surface Mounting with Detached Operator Panel or without Operator Panel (Housing
Size 1/1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
4.6.7 Detached Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
4.6.8 D-Subminiature Connector of Dongle Cable (Panel Flush or Cubicle Door Cutout) . . . . . 153
A Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
A.1.1 Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
A.1.1.1 6MD63 V4.6 (current release.../EE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
A.1.2 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
A.2 Terminal Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
A.2.1 Panel Flush and Cubicle Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
A.2.2 Panel Surface Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
A.2.3 Device with Detached Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
A.2.4 Mounting without Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
A.2.5 Connector Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
A.3 Connection Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
A.3.1 Current and Voltage Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
A.3.2 Connection Examples for RTD-boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
A.4 Current Transformer Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
A.4.1 Accuracy limiting factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
A.4.2 Class conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
A.4.3 Cable core balance current transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
A.5 Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
A.5.1 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
A.5.2 Binary Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
A.5.3 Binary Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
A.5.4 Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
A.5.5 Default Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
A.5.6 Pre-defined CFC Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
A.6 Protocol-dependent Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
A.7 Functional Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Contents
12 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
A.8 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
A.9 Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
A.10 Group Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
A.11 Measured Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Literature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
1 Introduction
14 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
1.1 Overall Operation
The SIPROTEC® 6MD63 is a digital input/output unit with local control equipped with
a powerful microprocessor. This provides fully numerical processing of all functions in
the device, from the acquisition of the measured values up to the output of commands
to the circuit breakers. Figure 1-1 shows the basic structure of the device.
Analog Inputs The measuring inputs (MI) convert the currents and voltages coming from the instru-
ment transformers and adapt them to the level appropriate for the internal processing
of the device. The device is provided with 4 current and 3 voltage inputs. There are 3
current inputs for the input of phase currents. The 4th. input can be used for measuring
the ground current IN (current transformer starpoint or via a separate ground current
transformer). The voltage inputs can either be used to measure the three phase-phase
voltages, or two phase-phase voltages and the displacement voltage (e–n voltage). It
is also possible to connect two phase-to-phase voltages. The analog input quantities
are passed on to the input amplifiers (IA).
Figure 1-1 Hardware Structure of the 6MD63 numerical input/output unit
1.1 Overall Operation
15
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
The input amplifier IA stage provides a high-resistance termination for the input quan-
tities. It consists of filters that are optimized for measured-value processing with
regard to bandwidth and processing speed.
The analog-to-digital (AD) stage consists of a multiplexor, an analog-to-digital (A/D)
converter and of memory components for the transmission of digital signals to the mi-
crocomputer system.
Microcomputer
System
The actual control functions and the control of the measured quantities are processed
in the microcomputer system (µC). They especially consist of:
• Filtering and preparation of the measured quantities
• Continuous monitoring of the measured quantities
• Control of signals for the logic functions
• Output of control commands for switching devices
• Storage of messages,
• Management of the operating system and the associated functions such as data re-
cording, real-time clock, communication, interfaces, etc.
Binary Inputs and
Outputs
The computer system obtains external information through the binary input/output
modules (inputs and outputs). The computer system obtains the information from the
system (e.g. remote resetting) or the external equipment (e.g. blocking commands).
Outputs are, in particular, commands to the switchgear units and annunciations for
remote signalling of important events and statuses.
Front Elements With devices with integrated or detached operator panel, information such as messag-
es related to events, states, measured values and the functional status of the device
are provided via light-emitting diodes (LEDs) and a display screen (LCD) on the front
panel.
Integrated control and numeric keys in conjunction with the LCD facilitate interaction
with the local device. Via these elements all information of the device such as config-
uration and setting parameters, operating messages and measured values can be ac-
cessed. Setting parameters may be changed in the same way.
In addition, control of circuit breakers and other equipment is possible from the front
panel of the device.
Serial Interfaces A serial PC interface at the front panel is provided for local communications with the
device through a personal computer using the operating program DIGSI®. This facili-
tates a comfortable handling of all device functions.
A separate service interface can be provided for remote communications via a
modem, or substation computer using DIGSI®. This interface is especially well suited
for the fixed wiring of the devices to the PC or operation via a modem.
All data can be transferred to a central control or monitoring system via the serial
system interface. This interface may be provided with various protocols and physical
transmission schemes to suit the particular application.
A further interface is provided for the time synchronization of the internal clock via
external synchronization sources.
Further communication protocols can be realized via additional interface modules.
1 Introduction
16 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Power Supply The before-mentioned function elements and their voltage levels are supplied with
power by a power supplying unit (Vaux or PS). Voltage dips may occur if the voltage
supply system (substation battery) becomes short-circuited. Usually, they are bridged
by a capacitor (see also Technical Data).
1.2 Application Scope
17
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
1.2 Application Scope
The SIPROTEC® 6MD63 is a numerical Input/Output Unit with Local Control equipped
with control and monitoring functions.
The device includes the functions that are necessary for monitoring of circuit breaker
positions, and control of the circuit breakers in straight bus applications or breaker-
and-a-half configurations; therefore, the devices can be universally employed.
Control Functions The device provides a control function which can be accomplished for activating and
deactivating switchgears via integrated operator panel, system interface, binary
inputs, and the serial port using a personal computer with DIGSI®.
The status of the primary equipment can be transmitted to the device via auxiliary con-
tacts connected to binary inputs. The present status (or position) of the primary equip-
ment can be displayed on the device, and used for interlocking or plausibility monitor-
ing. The number of the operating equipment to be switched is limited by the binary
inputs and outputs available in the device or the binary inputs and outputs allocated
for the switch position indications. Depending on the primary equipment being con-
trolled, one binary input (single point indication) or two binary inputs (double point in-
dication) may be used for this process.
The capability of switching primary equipment can be restricted by a setting associat-
ed with switching authority (Remote or Local), and by the operating mode (inter-
locked/non-interlocked, with or without password request).
Processing of interlocking conditions for switching (e.g. system interlocking) can be
established with the aid of integrated, user-configurable logic functions.
Messages and
Measured Values
The operating messages provide information about conditions in the power system
and the device. Measurement quantities and values that are calculated can be dis-
played locally and communicated via the serial interfaces.
Device messages can be allocated to a number of LEDs, externally processed via
output contacts, linked with user-definable logic functions and/or issued via serial in-
terfaces.
Communication Serial interfaces are available for the communication with operating, control and
memory systems.
A 9-pole DSUB socket at the front panel is used for local communication with a per-
sonal computer. By means of the SIPROTEC®4 operating software DIGSI®, all oper-
ational and evaluation tasks can be executed via this user interface, such as specify-
ing and modifying configuration parameters and settings, configuring user-specific
logic functions, retrieving operational messages and measured values, inquiring
device conditions and measured values, issuing control commands.
Depending on the individual ordering variant, additional interfaces are located at the
rear side of the device. They serve to establish an extensive communication with other
digital operating, control and memory components:
The service interface can be operated via electrical data lines or fiber optics and also
allows communication via modem. For this reason, remote operation is possible via
personal computer and the DIGSI® operating software, e.g. to operate several devices
via a central PC.
The system interface ensures the central communication between the device and the
substation controller. It can also be operated via data lines or fibre optic cables. For
1 Introduction
18 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
the data transfer Standard Protocols according IEC 60 870-5-103 are available via the
system port. The integration of the devices into the substation automation systems
SINAUT® LSA and SICAM® can also take place with this profile.
The EN-100-module allows the devices to be integrated in 100-Mbit-Ethernet commu-
nication networks in control and automation systems using protocols according to
IEC61850. Besides control system integration, this interface enables DIGSI-commu-
nication and inter-relay communication via GOOSE.
Alternatively, a field bus coupling with PROFIBUS FMS is available for SIPROTEC®
4. The PROFIBUS FMS according to DIN 19 245 is an open communication standard
that has particularly wide acceptance in process control and automation engineering,
with especially high performance. A profile has been defined for the PROFIBUS com-
munication that covers all of the information types required for protective and process
control engineering. The integration of the devices into the power automation system
SICAM® can also take place with this profile.
Besides the field-bus connection with PROFIBUS FMS, further couplings are possible
with PROFIBUS DP and the protocols DNP3.0 and MODBUS. These protocols do not
support all possibilities which are offered by PROFIBUS FMS.
1.3 Characteristics
19
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
1.3 Characteristics
General
Characteristics
• Powerful 32-bit microprocessor system.
• Complete numerical processing and control of measured values, from the sampling
of the analog input quantities to the initiation of outputs for, as an example, tripping
or closing circuit breakers or other switchgear devices.
• Total electrical separation between the internal processing stages of the device and
the external transformer, control, and DC supply circuits of the system because of
the design of the binary inputs, outputs, and the DC or AC converters.
• Complete set of functions necessary for the proper control of feeders or busbars.
• Easy device operation through an integrated operator panel or by means of a con-
nected personal computer running DIGSI.
• Continuous calculation and display of measured and metered values on the front of
the device
• Storage of min/max measured values (slave pointer function) and storage of long-
term mean values.
• Constant monitoring of the measurement quantities, as well as continuous self-di-
agnostics covering the hardware and software.
• Communication with SCADA or substation controller equipment via serial interfaces
through the choice of data cable, modem, or optical fibers.
• Battery-buffered clock that can be synchronized with an IRIG-B (via satellite) or
DCF77 signal, binary input signal, or system interface command.
• Statistics: Recording of the trip commands of the circuit breaker issued by the
device.
• Operating Hours Counter: Tracking of operating hours of the equipment under load.
• Commissioning aids such as as connection check, direction determination, status
indication of all binary inputs and outputs, easy check of system interface and influ-
encing of information of the system interface during test operation.
Breaker Control • Circuit breakers can be opened and closed via the process control keys (models
with graphic displays only) or the programmable function keys on the front panel,
through the system interface (e.g. by SICAM(r) or SCADA), or through the front PC
interface using a personal computer with DIGSI(r) 4);
• Circuit breakers are monitored via the breaker auxiliary contacts;
• Plausibility monitoring of the circuit breaker position and check of interlocking con-
ditions.
User-Defined
Functions
• Freely programmable combination of internal and external signals for the imple-
mentation of user defined logic functions;
• All common Boolean operations are available for programming (AND, OR, NOT, Ex-
clusive OR, etc.);
• Time delays and limit value inquiries;
• Processing of measured values, including zero suppression, adding a knee charac-
teristic for a transducer input, and live-zero monitoring.
1 Introduction
20 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Phase Rotation • Selectable phase rotation with a setting (static) or binary input (dynamic).
Monitoring
Functions
• Availability of the device is greatly increased because of self-monitoring of the inter-
nal measurement circuits, power supply, hardware, and software;
• Monitoring of the current and voltage transformer secondary circuits by means of
summation and symmetry checks;
• Phase rotation check.
RTD-Boxes • Detection of any ambient temperatures or coolant temperatures by means of RTD-
Boxes and external temperature sensors.
■
216MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Functions 2
This chapter describes the numerous functions available in the SIPROTEC® 4 6MD63.
It shows the setting possibilities for all the functions in maximum configuration. Instruc-
tions for deriving setting values and formulae, where required are provided.
Additionally, it may be defined which functions are to be used.
2.1 General 22
2.2 Monitoring Functions 28
2.3 Temperature Detection via RTD Boxes 38
2.4 Phase Rotation 47
2.5 Command Processing 49
2.6 Auxiliary Functions 62
2 Functions
22 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
2.1 General
The function parameters can be modified using the operating or service interface with
a personal computer using DIGSI®. The procedure is described in detail in the
SIPROTEC ® System Description /1/.
2.1.1 Functional Scope
Functions that are not required can be disabled configuring the functional scope.
2.1.1.1 Description
Configuration of
the Functional
Scope
For 6MD63 the configuration of the functional scope is restricted to the temperature
meters (RTD-boxes).
This additional function must be configured as enabled or disabled.
Functions configured as Disabled are not processed by the 6MD63. There are no
annunciations, and corresponding settings (functions, limit values) are not queried
during configuration.
Note
Available functions and default settings depend on the ordering code of the relay (see
A.1).
2.1.1.2 Setting Notes
Setting of the
Functional Scope
Configuration settings can be entered using a PC and the software program DIGSI
and transferred via the front serial port or the rear service interface. The operation via
DIGSI is explained in the SIPROTEC 4 System Description.
For changing configuration parameters in the device, password no. 7 is required (for
parameter set). Without the password, the settings may be read, but may not be mod-
ified and transmitted to the device.
The functional scope with the available options is set in the Functional Scope dialog
box to match plant requirements.
If you want to detect an ambient temperature or a coolant temperature, specify in
address 190 RTD-BOX INPUT the port to which the RTD-box is connected. For
6MD63, Port C (service port) is used for this purpose. The number and transmission
type of the temperature detectors (RTD = Resistance Temperature Detector) can be
specified in address191 RTD CONNECTION: 6 RTD simplex or 6 RTD HDX (with
one RTD-box) or 12 RTD HDX (with two RTD-boxes). The settings have to comply
with those of the RTD-box (see Subsection 2.3.2).
2.1 General
23
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
2.1.1.3 Settings
2.1.2 Power System Data 1
2.1.2.1 Description
The device requires certain basic data regarding the protected equipment, so that the
device can adapt to its desired application. Settings can only be performed in Power
System Data 1 using DIGSI.
Power System Data 1 comprises, e.g. nominal system data, nominal data of trans-
formers, polarity ratios and their physical connections and similar. Furthermore, there
are settings associated with all functions rather than a specific control or monitoring
function. The following section discusses these parameters.
2.1.2.2 Setting Notes
General To enter the Power System Data, use the operating program DIGSI.
Double-click on Settings and the desired selection options will be displayed. A dialog
box with tabs Power System Data 1, Power System and CT's will open under VT's
in which you can configure the individual parameters. Thus, the following descriptions
are structured accordingly.
Nominal
Frequency
The rated system frequency is set at address 214 Rated Frequency. The factory
presetting in accordance with the model number must only be changed if the device
will be employed for a purpose other than that which was planned when ordering.
Phase Rotation
Reversal
Address 209 PHASE SEQ. is used to change the default phase sequence (A B C for
clockwise rotation), if your power system permanently has an anti-clockwise phase se-
quence (A C B). A temporary reversal of rotation is also possible using binary inputs
(see Section 2.4.2).
Temperature Unit Parameter settings allow to display the temperature values either in degree Celsius
or in degree Fahrenheit under address 276 TEMP. UNIT.
Polarity of Current
Transformers
At address 201 CT Starpoint, the polarity of the wye-connected current transform-
ers is specified (the following figure applies correspondingly for two current transform-
ers). This setting determines the measuring direction of the device (forwards = line di-
rection). Modifying this setting also results in a polarity reversal of the ground current
inputs IN or INS.
Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments
190 RTD-BOX INPUT Disabled
Port C
Disabled External Temperature Input
191 RTD CONNECTION 6 RTD simplex
6 RTD HDX
12 RTD HDX
6 RTD simplex Ext. Temperature Input Connec-
tion Type
2 Functions
24 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Figure 2-1 Polarity of current transformers
Voltage
Connection
Address 213 specifies how the voltage transformers are connected. VT Connect.
3ph = Van, Vbn, Vcn means that three phase voltages in wye-connection are con-
nected, VT Connect. 3ph = Vab, Vbc, VGnd signifies that two phase-to-phase
voltages (V-connection) and VN are connected. The latter setting is also selected when
only two phase-to-phase voltage transformers are utilized or when only the displaced
voltage (zero sequence voltage) is connected to the device.
Nominal Values of
Current Transform-
ers (CTs)
At addresses 204 CT PRIMARY and 205 CT SECONDARY, information is entered re-
garding the primary and secondary ampere ratings of the current transformers. It is im-
portant to ensure that the rated secondary current of the current transformer matches
the rated current of the device, otherwise the device will incorrectly calculate primary
data. At addresses 217 Ignd-CT PRIM and 218 Ignd-CT SEC, information is
entered regarding the primary and secondary ampere rating of the current transform-
er. In case of normal connection (starpoint current connected to IN-transformer) 217
Ignd-CT PRIM and 204 CT PRIMARY must be set to the same value.
Nominal Values of
Voltage Transform-
ers (VTs)
At addresses 202 Vnom PRIMARY and 203 Vnom SECONDARY, information is entered
regarding the primary nominal voltage and secondary nominal voltage (phase-to-
phase) of the connected voltage transformers.
Transformation
Ratio of Voltage
T r a n s f o r m e r s ( V T s )
Address 206 Vph / Vdelta determines how the ground path of the voltage trans-
formers is connected. This information is relevant for the detection of ground faults (in
grounded systems and non-grounded systems) and measured-quantity monitoring.
If the voltage transformer set provides broken delta windings and if these windings are
connected to the device, this must be specified accordingly in address 213 (see above
margin heading "Voltage Connection"). Since transformation between voltage trans-
formers usually is as follows:
2.1 General
25
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
The factor Vph/Vdelta (secondary voltages, address 206 Vph / Vdelta) has the rela-
tion to 3/ √3 = √3 = 1.73 which must be used if the VN voltage is connected. For other
transformation ratios, i.e. the formation of the displacement voltage via an intercon-
nected transformer set, the factor must be corrected accordingly.
2.1.2.3 Settings
Addresses which have an appended "A" can only be changed with DIGSI, under "Ad-
ditional Settings".
2.1.2.4 Information List
Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments
201 CT Starpoint towards Line
towards Busbar
towards Line CT Starpoint
202 Vnom PRIMARY 0.10 .. 800.00 kV 12.00 kV Rated Primary Voltage
203 Vnom SECONDARY 100 .. 225 V 100 V Rated Secondary Voltage (L-L)
204 CT PRIMARY 10 .. 50000 A 100 A CT Rated Primary Current
205 CT SECONDARY 1A
5A
1A CT Rated Secondary Current
206A Vph / Vdelta 1.00 .. 3.00 1.73 Matching ratio Phase-VT To
Open-Delta-VT
209 PHASE SEQ. A B C
A C B
A B C Phase Sequence
213 VT Connect. 3ph Van, Vbn, Vcn
Vab, Vbc, VGnd
Van, Vbn, Vcn VT Connection, three-phase
214 Rated Frequency 50 Hz
60 Hz
50 Hz Rated Frequency
217 Ignd-CT PRIM 1 .. 50000 A 60 A Ignd-CT rated primary current
218 Ignd-CT SEC 1A
5A
1A Ignd-CT rated secondary current
276 TEMP. UNIT Celsius
Fahrenheit
Celsius Unit of temperature measurement
No. Information Type of In-
formation
Comments
5145 >Reverse Rot. SP >Reverse Phase Rotation
5147 Rotation ABC OUT Phase rotation ABC
5148 Rotation ACB OUT Phase rotation ACB
2 Functions
26 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
2.1.3 Power System Data 2
2.1.3.1 Description
The Power System Data 2 includes settings associated with all functions rather
than a specific control or monitoring function.
The Power System Data 2 can be found in DIGSI using the function selection
setting groups A.
Applications If the primary reference voltage and the primary reference current of the system are
set, the device is able to calculate and output the percentage operational measured
values.
2.1.3.2 Setting Notes
Definition of
Nominal Rated
Values
At addresses 1101 FullScaleVolt. and 1102 FullScaleCurr., the primary ref-
erence voltage (phase-to-phase) and reference current (phase) of the protected
equipment is entered (e.g. motors). If these reference values match the primary values
of the VT and CT rating, they correspond to the settings in address 202 and 204 (Sub-
section 2.1.2). They are generally used to show values referenced to full scale.
The settings for the Power System Data 2 can be performed via the front panel or
DIGSI.
Inversion of Mea-
sured Power Values
/ Metered Values
The directional values (power, power factor, work and related min., max., mean and
thresholds), calculated in the operational measured values, are usually defined with
positive direction towards the protected device. This requires that the connection po-
larity for the entire device was configured accordingly in the P.System Data 1 (com-
pare also "Polarity of Current Transformers", address 201). It is also possible to apply
different settings to the “forward“ direction for the monitoring functions and the positive
direction for the power etc., e.g. to have the active power supply (from the line to the
busbar) displayed positively. To do so, set address 1108 P,Q sign to reversed. If
the setting is not reversed (default), the positive direction for the power etc. corre-
sponds to the “forward“ direction for the monitoring functions.
2.1.3.3 Settings
Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments
1101 FullScaleVolt. 0.10 .. 800.00 kV 12.00 kV Measurem:FullScaleVolt-
age(Equipm.rating)
1102 FullScaleCurr. 10 .. 50000 A 100 A Measurem:FullScaleCur-
rent(Equipm.rating)
1108 P,Q sign not reversed
reversed
not reversed P,Q operational measured values
sign
2.1 General
27
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
2.1.3.4 Information List
2.1.4 Ethernet EN100-Modul
2.1.4.1 Functional Description
The Ethernet EN100-Modul enables integration of the 6MD63 in 100-Mbit com-
munication networks in control and automation systems with the protocols according
to IEC61850 standard (deliverable with version V4.60). This standard permits contin-
uous communication of the devices without gateways and protocol converters. Even
when installed in heterogeneous environments, SIPROTEC relays therefore provide
for open and interoperable operation. Besides control system integration, this port
enable DIGSI- and inter-relay communication.
2.1.4.2 Setting Notes
Interface Selection No special settings are required for operating the Ethernet system interface module
(IEC61850, EN100-Modul 1). If the ordered version of the device is equipped with
such a module, it is automatically allocated to the interface available for it, namely
Port B.
2.1.4.3 Information List
No. Information Type of In-
formation
Comments
16019 - SP -
No. Information Type of In-
formation
Comments
009.0100 Failure Modul IntSP Failure EN100 Modul
009.0101 Fail Ch1 IntSP Failure EN100 Link Channel 1 (Ch1)
009.0102 Fail Ch2 IntSP Failure EN100 Link Channel 2 (Ch2)
2 Functions
28 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
2.2 Monitoring Functions
The device is equipped with extensive monitoring capabilities - both for hardware and
software. In addition, the measured values are also constantly monitored for plausibil-
ity, therefore, the current transformer and voltage transformer circuits are largely inte-
grated into the monitoring.
2.2.1 Measurement Supervision
2.2.1.1 General
The device monitoring extends from the measuring inputs to the binary outputs. Mon-
itoring checks the hardware for malfunctions and impermissible conditions.
Hardware and software monitoring described in the following are enabled permanent-
ly. Settings (including the possibility to activate and deactivate the monitoring function)
refer to monitoring of external transformers circuits.
2.2.1.2 Hardware Monitoring
Auxiliary and
Reference Voltages
The processor voltage of 5 VDC is monitored by the hardware since if it goes below
the minimum value, the processor is no longer functional. The device is under such a
circumstance put out of operation. When the voltage returns, the processor system is
restarted.
Failure of the supply voltage puts the device out of operation and a message is imme-
diately generated by a dead contact. Brief auxiliary voltage interruptions of less than
50 ms do not disturb the readiness of the device (for nominal auxiliary voltage >
110 VDC).
The processor monitors the offset and reference voltage of the ADC (analog-digital
converter). The device is put out of operation if the voltages deviate outside an allow-
able range, and persistent deviations are reported.
Buffer Battery The buffer battery, which ensures operation of the internal clock and storage of
counters and messages if the auxiliary voltage fails, is periodically checked for charge
status. On its undershooting a minimum admissible voltage, the “Fail Battery”
indication is issued.
Memory
Components
All working memories (RAMs) are checked during start-up. If a fault occurs, the start
is aborted and a LED starts flashing. During operation the memories are checked with
the help of their checksum. For the program memory, the cross sum is formed cycli-
cally and compared to the stored program cross sum.
For the settings memory, the cross sum is formed cyclically and compared to the cross
sum that is freshly generated each time a setting process has taken place.
If a fault occurs the processor system is restarted.
2.2 Monitoring Functions
29
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Sampling Sampling and the synchronization between the internal buffer components are con-
stantly monitored. If any deviations cannot be removed by renewed synchronization,
then the processor system is restarted.
2.2.1.3 Software Monitoring
Watchdog For continuous monitoring of the program sequences, a time monitor is provided in the
hardware (hardware watchdog) that expires upon failure of the processor or an inter-
nal program, and causes a complete restart of the processor system.
An additional software watchdog ensures that malfunctions during the processing of
programs are discovered. This also initiates a restart of the processor system.
If such a malfunction is not cleared by the restart, an additional restart attempt is
begun. After three unsuccessful restarts within a 30 second window of time, the device
automatically removes the Input / Output unit itself from service and the red "Error"
LED lights up. The readiness relay drops out and indicates "device malfunction" with
its normally closed contact.
O f f s e t M o n i t o r i n g This monitoring function checks all ring buffer data channels for corrupt offset replica-
tion of the analog/digital transformers and the analog input paths using offset filters.
The eventual offset errors are detected using DC voltage filters and the associated
samples are corrected up to a specific limit. If this limit is exceeded an indication is
issued (191 “Error Offset”) that is part of the warn group annunciation (annunci-
ation 160). As increased offset values affect the reliability of measurements taken, we
recommend to send the device to the OEM plant for corrective action if this annunci-
ation continuously occurs.
2.2.1.4 Monitoring of the Transformer Circuits
Interruptions or short circuits in the secondary circuits of the current and voltage trans-
formers, as well as faults in the connections (important during commissioning!), are
detected and reported by the device. The measured quantities are cyclically checked
in the background for this purpose.
Measurement Value
Acquisition –
Currents
Up to four input currents are measured by the device. If the three phase currents and
the earth fault current from the current transformer star point or a separated earth
current transformer of the line to be protected are connected to the device, their digi-
tised sum must be zero. Faults in the current circuit are recognised if
IF = | iA + iB + iC + kI · iN | > Σ I THRESHOLD · INom + Σ I FACTOR · Imax
The factor kI takes into account a possible difference in the neutral current transformer
ratio IN (e.g. toroidal current transformer, see addresses 217, 218, 204 and 205):
Σ I THRESHOLD and Σ I FACTOR are programmable settings. The component Σ I
FACTOR · Imax takes into account the permissible current proportional ratio errors of the
2 Functions
30 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
input transformer which are particularly prevalent during large short-circuit currents
(Figure 2-2). The dropout ratio is about 97 %.This malfunction is reported as
“Failure Σ I”.
Figure 2-2 Current sum monitoring
Current Balance During normal system operation, balance among the input currents is expected. The
symmetry is monitored in the device by magnitude comparison. The smallest phase
current is compared to the largest phase current. Imbalance is detected if
| Imin | / | Imax | < BAL. FACTOR I, as long as Imax / INom > BALANCE I LIMIT / INom.
Where Imax is the largest of the three phase currents and Imin the smallest. The balance
factor BAL. FACTOR I represents the allowable asymmetry of the phase currents
while the limit value BALANCE I LIMIT is the lower limit of the operating range of
this monitoring (see Figure 2-3). Both parameters can be set. The dropout ratio is
about 97%.
This imbalance is reported as “Fail I balance”.
2.2 Monitoring Functions
31
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Figure 2-3 Current balance monitoring
Voltage Balance During normal system operation (i.e. the absence of a fault), balance among the input
voltages is expected. Because the phase-to-phase voltages are insensitive to ground
connections, the phase-to-phase voltages are used for balance monitoring. If the
device is connected to the phase-to-ground voltages, the phase-to-phase voltages are
calculated on their basis. If the device is connected to two phase-to-phase voltages
and the displacement voltage V0, the third phase-to-phase voltage is calculated ac-
cordingly. From the phase-to-phase voltages, the device generates the rectified
average values and checks the balance of their absolute values. The smallest phase
voltage is compared with the largest phase voltage. Imbalance is recognized if:
| Vmin | / | Vmax | < BAL. FACTOR V, as long as | Vmax | > BALANCE V-LIMIT.
Where Vmax is the highest of the three voltages and Vmin the smallest. The balance
factor BAL. FACTOR V is the measure for the imbalance of the voltages; the limit
value BALANCE V-LIMIT is the lower limit of the operating range of this monitoring
function (see Figure 2-4). Both parameters can be set. The dropout ratio is about 97%.
This imbalance is reported as “Fail V balance”.
2 Functions
32 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Figure 2-4 Voltage balance monitoring
Current and Voltage
Phase Sequence
To detect swapped phase connections in the voltage and current input circuits, the
phase sequence of the phase-to-phase measured voltages and the phase currents
are checked by monitoring the sequence of same polarity zero transitions of the volt-
ages.
Voltages: VA before VB before VC and
Currents: IA before IB before IC
Verification of the voltage phase rotation is done when each measured voltage is at
least
| VA|, |VB|, |VC| > 40 V/√3
Verification of the current phase rotation is done when each measured current is at
least
|IA|, |IB|, |IC| > 0.5 INom.
For abnormal phase sequences, the messages “Fail Ph. Seq. V” or “Fail Ph.
Seq. I” are issued, along with the switching of this message “Fail Ph. Seq.”.
For applications in which an opposite phase sequence is expected, the protective
relay should be adjusted via a binary input or a programmable setting. If the phase se-
quence is changed in the device, phases B and C internal to the relay are reversed,
and the positive and negative sequence currents are thereby exchanged (see also
Section 2.4). This does not affect the phase-related messages, imbalance values, and
measured values are.
2.2 Monitoring Functions
33
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
2.2.1.5 Setting Notes
General Measured value monitoring can be turned ON or OFF at address 8101 MEASURE.
SUPERV.
Measured Value
Monitoring
The sensitivity of the measured value monitor can be modified. Default values which
are sufficient in most cases are present. If especially high operating asymmetry in the
currents and/or voltages are to be expected during operation, or if it becomes apparent
during operation that certain monitoring functions activate sporadically, then the
setting should be less sensitive.
Address 8102 BALANCE V-LIMIT determines the limit voltage (phase-to-phase),
above which the voltage balance monitor is effective. Address 8103 BAL. FACTOR
V is the associated balance factor; that is, the slope of the balance characteristic
curve.
Address 8104 BALANCE I LIMIT determines the limit voltage (phase-to-phase),
above which the voltage balance monitor is effective. Address 8105 BAL. FACTOR
I is the associated balance factor; that is, the slope of the balance characteristic
curve.
Address 8106 Σ I THRESHOLD determines the limit current, above which the current
sum monitor is activated (absolute portion, only relative to INom). The relative portion
(relative to the maximum conductor current) for activating the current sum monitor is
set at address 8107 Σ I FACTOR.
Note
Current sum monitoring can operate properly only when the residual current of the
protected line is fed to the fourth current input (IN) of the relay.
Note
The connections of the ground paths and their adaption factors were set when config-
uring the general station data. These settings must be correct for the measured value
monitoring to function properly.
2 Functions
34 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
2.2.1.6 Settings
The table indicates region-specific presettings. Column C (configuration) indicates the
corresponding secondary nominal current of the current transformer.
2.2.1.7 Information List
Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
8101 MEASURE. SUPERV OFF
ON
ON Measurement Supervision
8102 BALANCE V-LIMIT 10 .. 100 V 50 V Voltage Threshold for
Balance Monitoring
8103 BAL. FACTOR V 0.58 .. 0.90 0.75 Balance Factor for Voltage
Monitor
8104 BALANCE I LIMIT 1A 0.10 .. 1.00 A 0.50 A Current Threshold for
Balance Monitoring
5A 0.50 .. 5.00 A 2.50 A
8105 BAL. FACTOR I 0.10 .. 0.90 0.50 Balance Factor for Current
Monitor
8106 Σ I THRESHOLD 1A 0.05 .. 2.00 A; ∞0.10 A Summated Current Moni-
toring Threshold
5A 0.25 .. 10.00 A; ∞0.50 A
8107 Σ I FACTOR 0.00 .. 0.95 0.10 Summated Current Moni-
toring Factor
No. Information Type of In-
formation
Comments
161 Fail I Superv. OUT Failure: General Current Supervision
162 Failure Σ I OUT Failure: Current Summation
163 Fail I balance OUT Failure: Current Balance
167 Fail V balance OUT Failure: Voltage Balance
170 VT FuseFail OUT VT Fuse Failure (alarm instantaneous)
171 Fail Ph. Seq. OUT Failure: Phase Sequence
175 Fail Ph. Seq. I OUT Failure: Phase Sequence Current
176 Fail Ph. Seq. V OUT Failure: Phase Sequence Voltage
197 MeasSup OFF OUT Measurement Supervision is switched OFF
6509 >FAIL:FEEDER VT SP >Failure: Feeder VT
6510 >FAIL: BUS VT SP >Failure: Busbar VT
2.2 Monitoring Functions
35
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
2.2.2 Malfunction Responses of the Monitoring Functions
In the following malfunction responses of monitoring equipment are clearly listed.
2.2.2.1 Description
Malfunction
Responses
Depending on the type of malfunction discovered, an annunciation is sent, a restart of
the processor system is initiated, or the device is taken out of service. After three un-
successful restart attempts, the device is taken out of service. The live status contact
operates to indicate the device is malfunctioning. In addition, if the internal auxiliary
supply is present, the red LED "ERROR" lights up at the front cover and the green
"RUN" LED goes out. If the internal auxiliary voltage fails, then all LEDs are dark. Table
2-1 shows a summary of the monitoring functions and the malfunction responses of
the relay.
2 Functions
36 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Table 2-1 Summary of Malfunction Responses by the Relay
Monitoring Possible
Causes
Malfunction Re-
sponse
Indication (No.) Device
AC/DC supply
voltage loss
External (aux.
voltage) inter-
nal (convert-
er)
Device not in operation All LEDs dark DOK2) drops
out
Internal supply
voltages
Internal
(power
supply)
Device not in operation LED ”ERROR" DOK2) drops
out
Buffer battery Internal
(Buffer bat-
tery)
Message “Fail Battery” (177)
Hardware
Watchdog
Internal (pro-
cessor failure)
Device not in operation
1)
LED ”ERROR" DOK2) drops
out
Software
watchdog
internal (pro-
cessor failure)
Restart attempt 1) LED ”ERROR" DOK2) drops
out
Working
memory RAM
Internal (hard-
ware)
Relay aborts restart,
Device shutdown
LED flashes DOK2) drops
out
Program
memory RAM
Internal (hard-
ware)
During boot sequence LED ”ERROR" DOK2) drops
out
Detection during oper-
ation: Restart attempt
1)
LED ”ERROR"
Settings
memory
Internal (hard-
ware)
Restart attempt 1) LED ”ERROR" DOK2) drops
out
Sampling fre-
quency
Internal (hard-
ware)
Device not in operation LED ”ERROR" DOK2) drops
out
Error in the I/O-
board
Internal (hard-
ware)
Device not in operation “I/O-Board error”
(178),
LED ”ERROR"
DOK2) drops
out
Module error Internal (hard-
ware)
Device not in operation “Error Board 1” to
“Error Board 7” (178 to
189),
LED ”ERROR"
DOK2) drops
out
Internal auxilia-
ry voltage 5 V
Internal (hard-
ware)
Device not in operation “Error 5V” (144),
LED ”ERROR"
DOK2) drops
out
0 V-Monitoring Internal (hard-
ware)
Device not in operation “Error 0V” (145),
LED ”ERROR"
DOK2) drops
out
Internal auxilia-
ry voltage -5 V
Internal (hard-
ware)
Device not in operation “Error -5V” (146),
LED ”ERROR"
DOK2) drops
out
Offset Monitor-
ing
Internal (hard-
ware)
Device not in operation “Error Offset” (191) DOK2) drops
out
Internal supply
voltages
Internal (hard-
ware)
Device not in operation “Error PwrSupply”
(147),
LED ”ERROR"
DOK2) drops
out
Current Sum Internal (mea-
sured value
acquisition)
Message “Failure Σ I” (162) As allocated
Current
Balance
External
(power
system or
current trans-
former)
Annunciation “Fail I balance” (163) As allocated
2.2 Monitoring Functions
37
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
1) After three unsuccessful restarts, the device is taken out of service.
2) DOK = "Device Okay" = Ready for service relay drops off, protection and control function are
blocked.
Group Alarms Certain messages of the monitoring functions are already combined to group alarms.
A listing of the group alarms and their composition is given in the Appendix A.10.
Voltage
balance
External
(power
system or
voltage trans-
former)
Annunciation “Fail V balance” (167) As allocated
Voltage phase
sequence
External
(power
system or
connection)
Annunciation “Fail Ph. Seq.” 171) As allocated
Current phase
sequence
External
(power
system or
connection)
Annunciation “Fail Ph. Seq. I” (175) As allocated
Monitoring Possible
Causes
Malfunction Re-
sponse
Indication (No.) Device
2 Functions
38 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
2.3 Temperature Detection via RTD Boxes
Up to two temperature detection units (RTD-boxes) with 12 measuring sensors in total
can be applied for temperature detection and are processed by the input/output
device.
Applications • In particular they enable the thermal status of motors, generators and transformers
to be monitored. Rotating machines are additionally monitored for a violation of the
bearing temperature thresholds. The temperatures are measured in different loca-
tions of the protected object by employing temperature sensors (RTD = Resistance
Temperature Detector) and are transmitted to the device via one or two 7XV566
RTD-boxes.
2.3.1 Description
RTD-Box 7XV56 The RTD-box 7XV566 is an external device mounted on a standard DIN rail. It features
6 temperature inputs and one RS485 interface for communication with the input/output
device. The RTD-box detects the coolant temperature of each measuring point from
the resistance value of the temperature detectors (Pt 100, Ni 100 or Ni 120) connected
via two- or three-wires and converts it to a digital value. The digital values are made
available at a serial port.
Processing
Temperatures
The transmitted raw temperature data is converted to a temperature in degrees
Celsius or Fahrenheit. The conversion depends on the temperature sensor used.
For each temperature detector two thresholds decisions can be performed which are
available for further processing. The user can make the corresponding allocations in
the configuration matrix.
An alarm is issued for each temperature sensor in the event of a short-circuit or inter-
ruption in the sensor circuit.
The following figure shows the logic diagram for temperature processing.
2.3 Temperature Detection via RTD Boxes
39
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
The manual supplied with the RTD-box contains a connection diagram and dimen-
sioned drawing.
Figure 2-5 Logic diagram of the temperature processing for RTD-box 1
2.3.2 Setting Notes
General Temperature detection is only effective and accessible if it was assigned to an inter-
face during configuration. At address 190 RTD-BOX INPUT the RTD-box(es) was al-
located to the interface at which it will be operated (port C). The number of sensor
inputs and the communication mode were set at address 191 RTD CONNECTION. The
temperature unit (°C or °F) was set in the P.System Data 1 at address 276 TEMP.
UNIT.
Device Settings The settings are the same for each input and are here shown at the example of mea-
suring input 1.
Set the type of temperature detector for RTD 1 (temperature sensor for measuring
point 1) at address 9011 RTD 1 TYPE. You can choose between Pt 100 Ω , Ni
120 Ω and Ni 100 Ω. If no temperature detector is available for RTD 1, set RTD 1
TYPE = Not connected. This setting is only possible via DIGSI at Additional Set-
tings.
Address 9012 RTD 1 LOCATION informs the device on the mounting location of RTD
1. You can choose between Oil, Ambient, Winding, Bearing and Other. This
setting is only possible via DIGSI at Additional Settings.
Furthermore, you can set an alarm temperature and a tripping temperature. Depend-
ing on the temperature unit selected in the Power System Data (2.1.2 in address 276
TEMP. UNIT), the alarm temperature can be expressed in Celsius (°C) (address
2 Functions
40 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
9013 RTD 1 STAGE 1) or Fahrenheit (°F) (address 9014 RTD 1 STAGE 1). The
tripping temperature is set at address 9015 RTD 1 STAGE 2 in degree Celsius (°C)
or degree Fahrenheit (°F) at address 9016 RTD 1 STAGE 2.
The settings for all other connected temperature detectors are made accordingly (see
below in the table Settings for the RTD-boxes).
Settings on the
RTD-Box
If temperature detectors are used with two-wire connection, the line resistance (for
short-circuited temperature detector) must be measured and adjusted. For this pur-
pose, select mode 6 in the RTD-box and enter the resistance value for the
corresponding temperature detector (range 0 to 50.6 Ω). If a 3-wire connection is
used, no further settings are required to this end.
A baudrate of 9600 bits/s ensures communication. Parity is even. The factory setting
of the bus number is 0. Modifications at the RTD-box can be made in mode 7. The
following convention applies:
Table 2-2 Setting the bus address at the RTD-box
Further information is provided in the operating manual of the RTD-box.
Processing Mea-
sured Values and
Messages
The RTD-box is visible in DIGSI as part of the 6MD63 device, i.e. messages and mea-
sured values appear in the configuration matrix just like those of internal functions, and
can be masked and processed in the same way. Messages and measured values can
thus be forwarded to the integrated user-defined logic (CFC) and interconnected as
desired.
If it is desired that a message should appear in the event buffer, a cross must be
entered in the intersecting box of column/row.
Mode Number of RTD-boxes Address
simplex 1 0
half duplex 1 1
half duplex 2 1. RTD-box: 1
2. RTD-box: 2
2.3 Temperature Detection via RTD Boxes
41
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
2.3.3 Settings
Addresses which have an appended "A" can only be changed with DIGSI, under "Ad-
ditional Settings".
Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments
9011A RTD 1 TYPE Not connected
Pt 100 Ω
Ni 120 Ω
Ni 100 Ω
Pt 100 ΩRTD 1: Type
9012A RTD 1 LOCATION Oil
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
Oil RTD 1: Location
9013 RTD 1 STAGE 1 -50 .. 250 °C; ∞100 °C RTD 1: Temperature Stage 1
Pickup
9014 RTD 1 STAGE 1 -58 .. 482 °F; ∞212 °F RTD 1: Temperature Stage 1
Pickup
9015 RTD 1 STAGE 2 -50 .. 250 °C; ∞120 °C RTD 1: Temperature Stage 2
Pickup
9016 RTD 1 STAGE 2 -58 .. 482 °F; ∞248 °F RTD 1: Temperature Stage 2
Pickup
9021A RTD 2 TYPE Not connected
Pt 100 Ω
Ni 120 Ω
Ni 100 Ω
Not connected RTD 2: Type
9022A RTD 2 LOCATION Oil
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
Other RTD 2: Location
9023 RTD 2 STAGE 1 -50 .. 250 °C; ∞100 °C RTD 2: Temperature Stage 1
Pickup
9024 RTD 2 STAGE 1 -58 .. 482 °F; ∞212 °F RTD 2: Temperature Stage 1
Pickup
9025 RTD 2 STAGE 2 -50 .. 250 °C; ∞120 °C RTD 2: Temperature Stage 2
Pickup
9026 RTD 2 STAGE 2 -58 .. 482 °F; ∞248 °F RTD 2: Temperature Stage 2
Pickup
9031A RTD 3 TYPE Not connected
Pt 100 Ω
Ni 120 Ω
Ni 100 Ω
Not connected RTD 3: Type
9032A RTD 3 LOCATION Oil
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
Other RTD 3: Location
9033 RTD 3 STAGE 1 -50 .. 250 °C; ∞100 °C RTD 3: Temperature Stage 1
Pickup
2 Functions
42 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
9034 RTD 3 STAGE 1 -58 .. 482 °F; ∞212 °F RTD 3: Temperature Stage 1
Pickup
9035 RTD 3 STAGE 2 -50 .. 250 °C; ∞120 °C RTD 3: Temperature Stage 2
Pickup
9036 RTD 3 STAGE 2 -58 .. 482 °F; ∞248 °F RTD 3: Temperature Stage 2
Pickup
9041A RTD 4 TYPE Not connected
Pt 100 Ω
Ni 120 Ω
Ni 100 Ω
Not connected RTD 4: Type
9042A RTD 4 LOCATION Oil
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
Other RTD 4: Location
9043 RTD 4 STAGE 1 -50 .. 250 °C; ∞100 °C RTD 4: Temperature Stage 1
Pickup
9044 RTD 4 STAGE 1 -58 .. 482 °F; ∞212 °F RTD 4: Temperature Stage 1
Pickup
9045 RTD 4 STAGE 2 -50 .. 250 °C; ∞120 °C RTD 4: Temperature Stage 2
Pickup
9046 RTD 4 STAGE 2 -58 .. 482 °F; ∞248 °F RTD 4: Temperature Stage 2
Pickup
9051A RTD 5 TYPE Not connected
Pt 100 Ω
Ni 120 Ω
Ni 100 Ω
Not connected RTD 5: Type
9052A RTD 5 LOCATION Oil
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
Other RTD 5: Location
9053 RTD 5 STAGE 1 -50 .. 250 °C; ∞100 °C RTD 5: Temperature Stage 1
Pickup
9054 RTD 5 STAGE 1 -58 .. 482 °F; ∞212 °F RTD 5: Temperature Stage 1
Pickup
9055 RTD 5 STAGE 2 -50 .. 250 °C; ∞120 °C RTD 5: Temperature Stage 2
Pickup
9056 RTD 5 STAGE 2 -58 .. 482 °F; ∞248 °F RTD 5: Temperature Stage 2
Pickup
9061A RTD 6 TYPE Not connected
Pt 100 Ω
Ni 120 Ω
Ni 100 Ω
Not connected RTD 6: Type
9062A RTD 6 LOCATION Oil
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
Other RTD 6: Location
Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments
2.3 Temperature Detection via RTD Boxes
43
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
9063 RTD 6 STAGE 1 -50 .. 250 °C; ∞100 °C RTD 6: Temperature Stage 1
Pickup
9064 RTD 6 STAGE 1 -58 .. 482 °F; ∞212 °F RTD 6: Temperature Stage 1
Pickup
9065 RTD 6 STAGE 2 -50 .. 250 °C; ∞120 °C RTD 6: Temperature Stage 2
Pickup
9066 RTD 6 STAGE 2 -58 .. 482 °F; ∞248 °F RTD 6: Temperature Stage 2
Pickup
9071A RTD 7 TYPE Not connected
Pt 100 Ω
Ni 120 Ω
Ni 100 Ω
Not connected RTD 7: Type
9072A RTD 7 LOCATION Oil
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
Other RTD 7: Location
9073 RTD 7 STAGE 1 -50 .. 250 °C; ∞100 °C RTD 7: Temperature Stage 1
Pickup
9074 RTD 7 STAGE 1 -58 .. 482 °F; ∞212 °F RTD 7: Temperature Stage 1
Pickup
9075 RTD 7 STAGE 2 -50 .. 250 °C; ∞120 °C RTD 7: Temperature Stage 2
Pickup
9076 RTD 7 STAGE 2 -58 .. 482 °F; ∞248 °F RTD 7: Temperature Stage 2
Pickup
9081A RTD 8 TYPE Not connected
Pt 100 Ω
Ni 120 Ω
Ni 100 Ω
Not connected RTD 8: Type
9082A RTD 8 LOCATION Oil
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
Other RTD 8: Location
9083 RTD 8 STAGE 1 -50 .. 250 °C; ∞100 °C RTD 8: Temperature Stage 1
Pickup
9084 RTD 8 STAGE 1 -58 .. 482 °F; ∞212 °F RTD 8: Temperature Stage 1
Pickup
9085 RTD 8 STAGE 2 -50 .. 250 °C; ∞120 °C RTD 8: Temperature Stage 2
Pickup
9086 RTD 8 STAGE 2 -58 .. 482 °F; ∞248 °F RTD 8: Temperature Stage 2
Pickup
9091A RTD 9 TYPE Not connected
Pt 100 Ω
Ni 120 Ω
Ni 100 Ω
Not connected RTD 9: Type
Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments
2 Functions
44 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
9092A RTD 9 LOCATION Oil
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
Other RTD 9: Location
9093 RTD 9 STAGE 1 -50 .. 250 °C; ∞100 °C RTD 9: Temperature Stage 1
Pickup
9094 RTD 9 STAGE 1 -58 .. 482 °F; ∞212 °F RTD 9: Temperature Stage 1
Pickup
9095 RTD 9 STAGE 2 -50 .. 250 °C; ∞120 °C RTD 9: Temperature Stage 2
Pickup
9096 RTD 9 STAGE 2 -58 .. 482 °F; ∞248 °F RTD 9: Temperature Stage 2
Pickup
9101A RTD10 TYPE Not connected
Pt 100 Ω
Ni 120 Ω
Ni 100 Ω
Not connected RTD10: Type
9102A RTD10 LOCATION Oil
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
Other RTD10: Location
9103 RTD10 STAGE 1 -50 .. 250 °C; ∞100 °C RTD10: Temperature Stage 1
Pickup
9104 RTD10 STAGE 1 -58 .. 482 °F; ∞212 °F RTD10: Temperature Stage 1
Pickup
9105 RTD10 STAGE 2 -50 .. 250 °C; ∞120 °C RTD10: Temperature Stage 2
Pickup
9106 RTD10 STAGE 2 -58 .. 482 °F; ∞248 °F RTD10: Temperature Stage 2
Pickup
9111A RTD11 TYPE Not connected
Pt 100 Ω
Ni 120 Ω
Ni 100 Ω
Not connected RTD11: Type
9112A RTD11 LOCATION Oil
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
Other RTD11: Location
9113 RTD11 STAGE 1 -50 .. 250 °C; ∞100 °C RTD11: Temperature Stage 1
Pickup
9114 RTD11 STAGE 1 -58 .. 482 °F; ∞212 °F RTD11: Temperature Stage 1
Pickup
9115 RTD11 STAGE 2 -50 .. 250 °C; ∞120 °C RTD11: Temperature Stage 2
Pickup
9116 RTD11 STAGE 2 -58 .. 482 °F; ∞248 °F RTD11: Temperature Stage 2
Pickup
Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments
2.3 Temperature Detection via RTD Boxes
45
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
2.3.4 Information List
9121A RTD12 TYPE Not connected
Pt 100 Ω
Ni 120 Ω
Ni 100 Ω
Not connected RTD12: Type
9122A RTD12 LOCATION Oil
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
Other RTD12: Location
9123 RTD12 STAGE 1 -50 .. 250 °C; ∞100 °C RTD12: Temperature Stage 1
Pickup
9124 RTD12 STAGE 1 -58 .. 482 °F; ∞212 °F RTD12: Temperature Stage 1
Pickup
9125 RTD12 STAGE 2 -50 .. 250 °C; ∞120 °C RTD12: Temperature Stage 2
Pickup
9126 RTD12 STAGE 2 -58 .. 482 °F; ∞248 °F RTD12: Temperature Stage 2
Pickup
No. Information Type of In-
formation
Comments
264 Fail: RTD-Box 1 OUT Failure: RTD-Box 1
267 Fail: RTD-Box 2 OUT Failure: RTD-Box 2
14101 Fail: RTD OUT Fail: RTD (broken wire/shorted)
14111 Fail: RTD 1 OUT Fail: RTD 1 (broken wire/shorted)
14112 RTD 1 St.1 p.up OUT RTD 1 Temperature stage 1 picked up
14113 RTD 1 St.2 p.up OUT RTD 1 Temperature stage 2 picked up
14121 Fail: RTD 2 OUT Fail: RTD 2 (broken wire/shorted)
14122 RTD 2 St.1 p.up OUT RTD 2 Temperature stage 1 picked up
14123 RTD 2 St.2 p.up OUT RTD 2 Temperature stage 2 picked up
14131 Fail: RTD 3 OUT Fail: RTD 3 (broken wire/shorted)
14132 RTD 3 St.1 p.up OUT RTD 3 Temperature stage 1 picked up
14133 RTD 3 St.2 p.up OUT RTD 3 Temperature stage 2 picked up
14141 Fail: RTD 4 OUT Fail: RTD 4 (broken wire/shorted)
14142 RTD 4 St.1 p.up OUT RTD 4 Temperature stage 1 picked up
14143 RTD 4 St.2 p.up OUT RTD 4 Temperature stage 2 picked up
14151 Fail: RTD 5 OUT Fail: RTD 5 (broken wire/shorted)
14152 RTD 5 St.1 p.up OUT RTD 5 Temperature stage 1 picked up
14153 RTD 5 St.2 p.up OUT RTD 5 Temperature stage 2 picked up
14161 Fail: RTD 6 OUT Fail: RTD 6 (broken wire/shorted)
14162 RTD 6 St.1 p.up OUT RTD 6 Temperature stage 1 picked up
14163 RTD 6 St.2 p.up OUT RTD 6 Temperature stage 2 picked up
14171 Fail: RTD 7 OUT Fail: RTD 7 (broken wire/shorted)
14172 RTD 7 St.1 p.up OUT RTD 7 Temperature stage 1 picked up
14173 RTD 7 St.2 p.up OUT RTD 7 Temperature stage 2 picked up
Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments
2 Functions
46 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
14181 Fail: RTD 8 OUT Fail: RTD 8 (broken wire/shorted)
14182 RTD 8 St.1 p.up OUT RTD 8 Temperature stage 1 picked up
14183 RTD 8 St.2 p.up OUT RTD 8 Temperature stage 2 picked up
14191 Fail: RTD 9 OUT Fail: RTD 9 (broken wire/shorted)
14192 RTD 9 St.1 p.up OUT RTD 9 Temperature stage 1 picked up
14193 RTD 9 St.2 p.up OUT RTD 9 Temperature stage 2 picked up
14201 Fail: RTD10 OUT Fail: RTD10 (broken wire/shorted)
14202 RTD10 St.1 p.up OUT RTD10 Temperature stage 1 picked up
14203 RTD10 St.2 p.up OUT RTD10 Temperature stage 2 picked up
14211 Fail: RTD11 OUT Fail: RTD11 (broken wire/shorted)
14212 RTD11 St.1 p.up OUT RTD11 Temperature stage 1 picked up
14213 RTD11 St.2 p.up OUT RTD11 Temperature stage 2 picked up
14221 Fail: RTD12 OUT Fail: RTD12 (broken wire/shorted)
14222 RTD12 St.1 p.up OUT RTD12 Temperature stage 1 picked up
14223 RTD12 St.2 p.up OUT RTD12 Temperature stage 2 picked up
No. Information Type of In-
formation
Comments
2.4 Phase Rotation
47
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
2.4 Phase Rotation
A phase rotation feature via binary input and parameter is implemented in the 6MD63
device.
Applications • Phase rotation ensures that all monitoring functions operate correctly even with
anti-clockwise rotation, without the need for two phases to be reversed.
2.4.1 Description
General Various functions of the 6MD63 only work correctly if the phase rotation of the voltages
and currents is known, e.g. measurement quantity monitoring.
If an "acb" phase rotation is normal, the appropriate setting is made during configura-
tion of the Power System Data.
If the phase rotation can change during operation (e.g. the direction of a motor must
be routinely changed), then a changeover signal at the routed binary input for this
purpose is sufficient to inform the input/output unit of the phase rotation reversal.
Logic Phase rotation is permanently established at address 209 PHASE SEQ. (Power
System Data). Via the exclusive-OR gate the binary input “>Reverse Rot.” inverts
the sense of the phase rotation applied with the setting.
Figure 2-6 Message logic of the phase-sequence reversal
Influence on
Monitoring
Functions
The swapping of phases directly impacts the calculation of positive and negative se-
quence quantities, as well as phase-to-phase voltages via the subtraction of one
phase-to-ground voltage from another and vice versa. Therefore, this function is vital
so that phase detection messages and operating measurement values are correct. As
stated before, this function influences some of the monitoring functions that issue
messages if the defined and calculated phase rotations do not match.
2 Functions
48 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
2.4.2 Setting Notes
Programming
Settings
The normal phase sequence is set at 209 (see Subsection 2.1.2.2). If, on the system
side, phase rotation is temporarily changed, then these are communicated to the in-
put/output unit using the binary input “>Reverse Rot.”, No. 5145
2.5 Command Processing
49
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
2.5 Command Processing
A control command process is integrated in the SIPROTEC ® 6MD63 to coordinate the
operation of circuit breakers and other equipment in the power system.
Control commands can originate from four command sources:
• Local operation using the keypad of the device (except for variant without operator
panel)
• Operation using DIGSI®
• Remote operation via network control center or substation controller (e.g. SICAM®)
• Automatic functions (e.g., using a binary input)
Switchgear with single and multiple busbars are supported. The number of switchgear
devices to be controlled is, basically, limited by the number of binary inputs and
outputs present. High security against inadvertent device operations can be ensured
if interlocking checks are enabled. A standard set of optional interlocking checks is
provided for each command issued to circuit breakers/switchgear.
2.5.1 Control Device
Devices with integrated or detached operator panel can control switchgear via the op-
erator panel of the device. In addition, control can be executed via the operator inter-
face using a personal computer and via the serial interface with a link to the substation
control equipment.
Applications • Switchgears with single and multiple busbars
Prerequisites The number of switchgear devices to be controlled is limited by the
– Binary inputs present
– Binary outputs present
2.5.1.1 Description
Operation using the
SIPROTEC® 4
Device
Commands can be initiated using the keypad on the local user interface of the relay.
For this purpose, there are three independent keys located below the graphic display.
The key CTRL causes the control display to appear in the LCD. Controlling of switch-
gears is only possible within this control display, since the two control keys OPEN and
CLOSE only become active as long as the control display is present. The LCD must
be changed back to the default display for other, non-control, operational modes.
The navigation keys V, W, W, X are used to select the desired device in the Control
Display. The I key or the O key is then pressed to convey the intended control com-
mand.
Consequently, the switch icon in the control display flashes in setpoint direction. At the
lower display edge, the user is requested to confirm his switching operation via the
ENTER key. Then a safety query appears. After the security check is completed, the
ENTER key must be pressed again to carry out the command. If this confirmation is not
performed within one minute, the setpoint flashing changes again to the correspond-
ing actual status. Cancellation via the ESC key is possible at any time before the control
command is issued.
2 Functions
50 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
During normal processing, the control display indicates the new actual status after the
control command was executed and the message “command end” at the lower
display edge. The indication “FB reached” is displayed briefly before the final indi-
cation in the case of switching commands with a feedback.
If the attempted command fails, because an interlocking condition is not met, then an
error message appears in the display. The message indicates why the control
command was not accepted (see also SIPROTEC® 4 System Description /1/). This
message must be acknowledged with Enter before any further control commands can
be issued.
Operation using the
DIGSI®
Control switching devices can be performed via the operator control interface by
means of the DIGSI® operating program installed on a PC.
The procedure to do so is described in the SIPROTEC® System Description /1/ (Con-
trol of Switchgear).
Operation using the
SCADA Interface
Control of switching devices can be performed via the serial system interface and a
connection to the switchgear control system. For this the required peripherals physi-
cally must exist both in the device and in the power system. Also, a few settings for
the serial interface in the device are required (see SIPROTEC® System Description
/1/).
Note
The switching commands (annunciations) listed in the following Information List are
examples preset. As they are only examples they may be deleted or overwritten by the
user.
2.5.1.2 Information List
No. Information Type of In-
formation
Comments
- 52Breaker CF_D12 52 Breaker
- 52Breaker DP 52 Breaker
- Disc.Swit. CF_D2 Disconnect Switch
- Disc.Swit. DP Disconnect Switch
- GndSwit. CF_D2 Ground Switch
- GndSwit. DP Ground Switch
- 52 Open IntSP Interlocking: 52 Open
- 52 Close IntSP Interlocking: 52 Close
- Disc.Open IntSP Interlocking: Disconnect switch Open
- Disc.Close IntSP Interlocking: Disconnect switch Close
- GndSw Open IntSP Interlocking: Ground switch Open
- GndSw Cl. IntSP Interlocking: Ground switch Close
- UnlockDT IntSP Unlock data transmission via BI
- Q2 Op/Cl CF_D2 Q2 Open/Close
- Q2 Op/Cl DP Q2 Open/Close
- Q9 Op/Cl CF_D2 Q9 Open/Close
2.5 Command Processing
51
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
2.5.2 Types of Commands
In conjunction with the power system control there are several command types that
must be considered.
2.5.2.1 Description
Commands to the
System
These are all commands that are directly output to the switchgear to change their
process state:
• Switching commands for the control of circuit breakers (not synchronized), discon-
nectors and ground electrode,
• Step commands, e.g. raising and lowering transformer LTCs
• Set-point commands with configurable time settings, e.g. to control Petersen coils
Internal / Pseudo
Commands
They do not directly operate binary outputs. They serve to initiate internal functions,
simulate changes of state, or to acknowledge changes of state.
• Manual overriding commands to manually update information on process-depen-
dent objects such as annunciations and switching states, e.g. if the communication
with the process is interrupted. Manually overridden objects are flagged as such in
the information status and can be displayed accordingly.
• Tagging commands are issued to establish internal settings, e.g. deleting / preset-
ting the switching authority (remote vs. local), a parameter set changeover, data
transmission block to the SCADA interface, and measured value set-points.
• Acknowledgment and resetting commands for setting and resetting internal buffers
or data states.
• Information status command to set/reset the additional information "information
status" of a process object, such as:
– Input blocking
– Output Blocking
- Q9 Op/Cl DP Q9 Open/Close
- Fan ON/OFF CF_D2 Fan ON/OFF
- Fan ON/OFF DP Fan ON/OFF
No. Information Type of In-
formation
Comments
2 Functions
52 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
2.5.3 Command Processing
Safety mechanisms in the command sequence ensure that a switch command can
only be released after a thorough check of preset criteria has been successfully con-
cluded. Standard Interlocking checks are provided for each individual control com-
mand. Additionally, user-defined interlocking conditions can be programmed sepa-
rately for each command. The actual execution of the command is also monitored
afterwards. The overall command task procedure is described in brief in the following
list:
2.5.3.1 Description
Check Sequence Please observe the following:
• Command Entry, e.g. using the keypad on the local user interface of the device
– Check Password → Access Rights
– Check Switching Mode (interlocking activated/deactivated) → Selection of Deac-
tivated Interlocking Recognition.
• User configurable interlocking checks
– Switching Authority
– Device Position Check (set vs. actual comparison)
– Interlocking, Zone Controlled (logic using CFC)
– System Interlocking (centrally, using SCADA system or substation controller)
– Double Operation (interlocking against parallel switching operations)
– Protection blocking (blocking of switching operations by protective functions, not
relevant for 6MD63)
• Fixed Command Checks
– Internal Process Time (software watch dog which checks the time for processing
the control action between initiation of the control and final close of the relay con-
tact).
– Setting Modification in Process (if setting modification is in process, commands
are denied or delayed)
– Operating equipment enabled as output (if an operating equipment component
was configured, but not configured to a binary input, the command is denied)
– Output Block (if an output block has been programmed for the circuit breaker,
and is active at the moment the command is processed, then the command is
denied)
– Board Hardware Error
– Command in Progress (only one command can be processed at a time for one
operating equipment, object-related Double Operation Block)
– 1-of-n-check (for schemes with multiple assignments, such as relays contact
sharing a common terminal a check is made if a command is already active for
this set of output relays).
2.5 Command Processing
53
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Monitoring the
Command
Execution
The following is monitored:
• Interruption of a command because of a Cancel Command
• Running Time Monitor (feedback message monitoring time)
2.5.4 Interlocking
System interlocking is executed by the user-defined logic (CFC).
2.5.4.1 Description
Switchgear interlocking checks in a SICAM/SIPROTEC system are normally divided
in the following groups:
• System interlocking relies on the system data base in the substation or central
control system,
• Bay interlocking relies on the object data base (feedbacks) of the bay unit.
• Cross-bay interlocking via GOOSE messages directly between bay units and pro-
tection relays (with the introduction of IEC61850, V4.60; GOOSE information ex-
change will be accomplished via EN100-module).
The extent of the interlocking checks is determined by the configuration of the relay.
To obtain more information about GOOSE, please refer to the SIPROTEC System De-
scription /1/.
Switching objects that require system interlocking in a central control system are as-
signed to a specific parameter inside the bay unit (via configuration matrix only possi-
ble for Profibus FMS to SICAM SAS).
For all commands, operation with interlocking (normal mode) or without interlocking
(Interlocking OFF) can be selected:
• for local commands, by activation of "Normal/Interlocking OFF"-key switch or
changing the configuration via password,
• for automatic commands, via command processing by CFC and deactivated inter-
locking recognition,
• for local / remote commands, using an additional interlocking disable command, via
Profibus.
Interlocked / Non-
Interlocked Switch-
ing
The configurable command checks in the SIPROTEC 4 devices are also called "stan-
dard interlocking". These checks can be activated via DIGSI (interlocked switch-
ing/tagging) or deactivated (non-interlocked).
Deactivated interlock switching means the configured interlocking conditions are not
checked in the relay.
Interlocked switching means that all configured interlocking conditions are checked
within the command processing. If a condition could not be fulfilled, the command will
be rejected by a message with a minus added to it (e.g. "CO-"), immediately followed
by message.
The following table shows the possible types of commands in a switching device and
their corresponding annunciations. For the device the messages designated with *)
are displayed in the event logs, for DIGSI they appear in spontaneous messages.
2 Functions
54 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
The "plus" appearing in the message is a confirmation of the command execution. The
command execution was as expected, in other words positive. The minus sign means
a negative confirmation, the command was rejected. Possible command feedbacks
and their causes are dealt with in the SIPROTEC 4 System Description. The following
figure shows operational indications relating to command execution and operation re-
sponse information for successful switching of the circuit breaker.
The check of interlocking can be programmed separately for all switching devices and
tags that were set with a tagging command. Other internal commands such as manual
entry or abort are not checked, i.e. carried out independent of the interlocking.
Figure 2-7 Example of an Operational Annunciation for Switching Circuit Breaker 52 (QO)
Standard Interlock-
ing Defaults (fixed
p r o g r a m m i n g )
The standard interlockings contain the following fixed programmed tests for each
switching device, which can be individually enabled or disabled using parameters:
• Device Status Check (set = actual): The switching command is rejected, and an
error indication is displayed if the circuit breaker is already in the set position. If this
check is enabled, then it works whether interlocking, e.g. zone controlled, is activat-
ed or deactivated. This condition is checked in both interlocked and non-interlocked
status modes.
• System Interlocking: To check the power system interlocking, a local command is
transmitted to the central unit with Switching Authority = LOCAL. A switching
d e vic e t h at i s s u bje ct t o sy s tem int e rl o ck i ng c a nn o t b e swi tch ed b y DIG SI.
• Zone Controlled /Bay Interlocking: Logic links in the device which were created via
CFC are interrogated and considered during interlocked switching.
• Blocked by Protection: This interlocking option enabled for devices with integrated
protection functions has no significance and no effect on the 6MD63 device version.
• Double Operation Block: Parallel switching operations are interlocked against one
another; while one command is processed, a second cannot be carried out.
• Switching Authority LOCAL: A control command from the user interface of the
device (command with command source LOCAL) is only allowed if the Key Switch
(for devices without key switch via configuration) is set to LOCAL.
Type of Command Control Cause Message
Control issued Switching CO CO+/–
Manual tagging (positive / nega-
tive)
Manual tagging MT MT+/–
Information state command, Input
blocking
Input blocking ST ST+/– *)
Information state command,
Output blocking
Output Blocking ST ST+/– *)
Cancel command Cancel CA CA+/–
2.5 Command Processing
55
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
• Switching Authority DIGSI: Switching commands that are issued locally or remotely
via DIGSI (command with command source DIGSI) are only allowed if remote
control is admissible for the device (by key switch or configuration). If a DIGSI-PC
communicates with the device, it deposits here its virtual device number (VD). Only
commands with this VD (when Switching Authority = REMOTE) will be accepted by
the device. Remote switching commands will be rejected.
• Switching Authority REMOTE: A remote control command (command with
command source REMOTE) is only allowed if the Key Switch (for devices without
key switch via configuration) is set to REMOTE.
Figure 2-8 Standard interlocking arrangements
1) The source of command REMOTE closes the source LOCAL with ON. (LOCAL: Command using a substation au-
tomation and control system in the station, REMOTE: Command using the telecontrol engineering for substation
control and control system and of substation control and control system for the device)
2) Release from testing of interlocking conditions
3) Not relevant for 6MD63
2 Functions
56 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
The following figure shows the configuration of the interlocking conditions using
DIGSI.
Figure 2-9 DIGSI® dialog box for setting the interlocking conditions
For devices with operator panel the display shows the configured interlocking reasons.
They are marked by letters explained in the following table.
Table 2-3 Command types and corresponding messages
1) Not relevant for 6MD63
The following figure shows all interlocking conditions (which usually appear in the
display of the device) for three switchgear items with the relevant abbreviations ex-
plained in the previous table. All parameterized interlocking conditions are indicated.
Interlocking Commands Abbrev. Message
Switching authority L L
System interlocking SI A
Zone controlled Z Z
SET= ACTUAL (switch direction check) S I
Protection blockage B 1) B 1)
2.5 Command Processing
57
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Figure 2-10 Example of configured interlocking conditions
Control Logic using
CFC
For the bay interlocking a control logic can be structured via the CFC. Via specific
release conditions the information "released” or "bay interlocked” are available (e.g.
object "52 Close" and "52 Open" with the data values: ON / OFF).
Switching Authori-
ty (for devices with
o p e r a t o r p a n e l )
The interlocking condition "Switching Authority" serves to determine the switching au-
thorization. It enables the user to select the authorized command source. For devices
with operator panel the following switching authority ranges are defined in the follow-
ing priority sequence:
•LOCAL
• DIGSI
•REMOTE
The object "Switching Authority" serves to interlock or enable LOCAL control, but not
REMOTE or DIGSI commands. The 6MD63 is equipped with two key switches. The
top switch is reserved for the switching authority. The position "Local" enables local
control, the position "Remote" enables remote control.
The "Switching authority DIGSI" is used for interlocking and allows commands to be
initiated using DIGSI. Commands are allowed for both remote and a local DIGSI con-
nection. When a (local or remote) DIGSI–PC logs on to the device, it enters its Virtual
Device Number (VD). The device only accepts commands having that VD (with
switching authority = OFF or REMOTE). When the DIGSI PC logs off, the VD is can-
celled.
Commands are checked for their source SC and the device settings, and compared
to the information set in the objects "Switching authority" and "Switching authority
DIGSI".
Configuration
Switching authority available: y/n (create appropriate object)
Switching authority available DIGSI: y/n (create appropriate object)
Specific device (e.g. switching de-
vice):
Switching authority LOCAL (check for
Local status): y/n
Specific device (e.g. switching de-
vice):
”Switching authority REMOTE"
(check for LOCAL, REMOTE, or
DIGSI commands): y/n
2 Functions
58 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Table 2-4 Interlocking logic
1) also "Allowed" for: ”switching” authority LOCAL (check for Local status): is not marked
2) also "Allowed" for: ”Switching” authority REMOTE (check for LOCAL, REMOTE, or DIGSI
status): is not marked
3) SC = Source of command
SC = Auto SICAM:
Commands that are initiated internally (command processing in the CFC) are not
subject to switching authority and are therefore always "allowed".
Switching Authori-
ty (for devices
without operator
panel)
The dongle cable sets the switching authority of the device to "REMOTE". The speci-
fications of the previous section apply.
Switching Mode
(for devices with
o p e r a t o r p a n e l )
The switching mode determines whether selected interlocking conditions will be acti-
vated or deactivated at the time of the switching operation.
The following switching modes (local) are defined:
• Local commands (SC = LOCAL)
– Interlocked (normal), or
– Non-interlocked switching.
The 6MD63 is equipped with two key switches. The bottom switch is reserved for the
switching mode. The "Normal" position allows interlocked switching while the "Inter-
locking OFF" position allows non-interlocked switching.
The following switching modes (remote) are defined:
• Remote or DIGSI commands (SC = LOCAL, REMOTE, or DIGSI)
– Interlocked, or
– Non-interlocked switching. Here, deactivation of interlocking is accomplished via
a separate command. The position of the key-switch is irrelevant.
– For commands from CFC (SC = AUTO SICAM), please observe the notes in the
DIGSI CFC manual /3/ (component: BOOL to command).
Current Switch-
ing Authority
Status
Switching
Authority
DIGSI
Command issued
with SC3)=LOCAL
Command issued
from SC=LOCAL or
REMOTE
Command
issued from
SC=DIGSI
LOCAL Not registered Allowed interlocked 2) -
"switching authority
LOCAL"
Interlocked -
"DIGSI not reg-
istered"
LOCAL Registered Allowed Interlocked 2) -
"switching authority
LOCAL"
Interlocked 2) -
"switching au-
thority LOCAL"
REMOTE Not registered Interlocked 1) -
"switching authority
REMOTE"
Allowed Interlocked -
"DIGSI not reg-
istered"
REMOTE Registered Interlocked 1) -
"switching authority
DIGSI"
Interlocked 2) -
"switching authority
DIGSI"
Allowed
2.5 Command Processing
59
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Switching Mode
(for devices without
operator panel)
The dongle cable sets the switching mode of the device to "Normal". The specifica-
tions of the previous section apply.
Zone Controlled /
F i e l d I n t e r l o c k i n g
Zone controlled / field interlocking (e.g. via CFC) includes the verification that prede-
termined switchgear position conditions are satisfied to prevent switching errors (e.g.
disconnector vs. ground switch, ground switch only if no voltage applied) as well as
verification of the state of other mechanical interlocking in the switchgear bay (e.g.
High Voltage compartment doors).
Interlocking conditions can be programmed separately, for each switching device, for
device control CLOSE and/or OPEN.
The enable information with the data "switching device is interlocked (OFF/NV/FLT) or
enabled (ON)" can be set up,
• directly, using a single point or double point indication, key-switch, or internal indi-
cation (marking), or
• by means of a control logic via CFC.
When a switching command is initiated, the actual status is scanned cyclically. The as-
signment is done via "Release object CLOSE/OPEN".
System
Interlocking
Substation Controller (System interlocking) involves switchgear conditions of other
bays evaluated by a central control system (only possible for Profibus FMS to SICAM
SAS).
Double Activation
Blo c k age
Parallel switching operations are interlocked. As soon as the command has arrived all
command objects subject to the interlocking are checked to know whether a command
is being processed. While the command is being executed, interlocking is enabled for
other commands.
Blocking by
Protection
This interlocking option enabled for devices with integrated protection functions has
no significance and no effect on the 6MD63 device version.
Device Status
Check (set = actual)
For switching commands, a check takes place whether the selected switching device
is already in the set/actual position (set/actual comparison). This means, if a circuit
breaker is already in the CLOSED position and an attempt is made to issue a closing
command, the command will be refused, with the operating message "set condition
equals actual condition". If the circuit breaker/switchgear device is in the intermediate
position, then this check is not performed.
2 Functions
60 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Bypassing
Interlocks
Bypassing configured interlocks at the time of the switching action happens device-
internal via interlocking recognition in the command job or globally via so-called
switching modes.
• SC=LOCAL
– The switching modes "interlocked (latched)" or "non-interlocked (unlatched)" can
be set via the key switch. The position "Interlocking OFF" corresponds to non-
interlocked switching and serves the special purpose of unlocking the standard
interlocks.
• REMOTE and DIGSI
– Commands issued by SICAM or DIGSI are unlocked via a global switching mode
REMOTE. A separate job order must be sent for the unlocking. The unlocking
applies only for one switching operation and for command caused by the same
source.
– Job order: command to object "Switching mode REMOTE", ON
– Job order: switching command to "switching device"
• Derived command via CFC (automatic command, SC=Auto SICAM):
– Behaviour configured in the CFC block ("BOOL to command").
2.5.5 Command Logging
During the processing of the commands, independent of the further message routing
and processing, command and process feedback information are sent to the message
processing centre. These messages contain information on the cause. With the cor-
responding allocation (configuration) these messages are entered in the event list,
thus serving as a report.
Prerequisites A listing of possible operating messages and their meaning as well as the command
types needed for tripping and closing of the switchgear or for raising and lowering of
transformer taps are described in the SIPROTEC 4 System Description.
2.5.5.1 Description
Acknowledgement
of Commands to
the Device Front
All messages with the source of command LOCAL are transformed into a
corresponding response and shown in the display of the device.
Acknowledgement
of commands to
Local / Remote /
Digsi
The acknowledgement of messages with source of command Local/ Remote/DIGSI
are sent back to the initiating point independent of the routing (configuration on the
serial digital interface).
The acknowledgement of commands is therefore not executed by a response indica-
tion as it is done with the local command but by ordinary command and feedback in-
formation recording.
2.5 Command Processing
61
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Monitoring of Feed-
back Information
The processing of commands monitors the command execution and timing of feed-
back information for all commands. At the same time the command is sent, the moni-
toring time is started (monitoring of the command execution). This time controls
whether the device achieves the required final result within the monitoring time. The
monitoring time is stopped as soon as the feedback information arrives. If no feedback
information arrives, a response "Timeout command monitoring time" appears and the
process is terminated.
Commands and information feedback are also recorded in the event list. Normally the
execution of a command is terminated as soon as the feedback information (FB+) of
the relevant switchgear arrives or, in case of commands without process feedback in-
formation, the command output resets and a message is output.
The "plus" sign appearing in a feedback information confirms that the command was
successful. The command was as expected, in other words positive. The "minus" is a
negative confirmation and means that the command was not executed as expected.
Command Output
and Switching
Relays
The command types needed for tripping and closing of the switchgear or for raising
and lowering of transformer taps are described in the configuration section of the
SIPROTEC 4 System Description /1/ .
2 Functions
62 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
2.6 Auxiliary Functions
Chapter Auxiliary Functions describes the general device functions.
2.6.1 Message Processing
The device is designed to perform message processing:
Applications • LED Display and Binary Outputs (Output Relays)
• Information via Display Field or Personal Computer
• Information to a Control Center
Prerequisites The SIPROTEC® 4 System Description gives a detailed description of the configura-
tion procedure (see /1/).
2.6.1.1 LED Display and Binary Outputs (Output relays)
Important events and conditions are displayed, using LEDs at the front panel of the
relay. The device furthermore has output relays for remote indication. All LEDs and
binary outputs indicating specific messages can be freely configured. The relay is de-
livered with a default setting. The Appendix of this manual deals in detail with the de-
livery status and the allocation options.
The output relays and the LEDs may be operated in a latched or unlatched mode
(each may be individually set).
The latched conditions are protected against loss of the auxiliary voltage. They are
reset:
• On site by pressing the LED key on the relay,
• Remotely using a binary input configured for that purpose,
• Using one of the serial interfaces,
• Automatically at the beginning of a new pickup.
State indication messages should not be latched. Also, they cannot be reset until the
criterion to be reported has reset. This applies to messages from monitoring functions,
or similar.
A green LED displays operational readiness of the relay ("RUN“), and cannot be reset.
It goes out if the self-check feature of the microprocessor recognizes an abnormal oc-
currence, or if the auxiliary voltage is lost.
When auxiliary voltage is present, but the relay has an internal malfunction, then the
red LED ("ERROR") lights up and the processor blocks the relay.
2.6 Auxiliary Functions
63
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
2.6.1.2 Information on the Integrated Display (LCD) or Personal Computer
Events and conditions can be read out on the display at the front cover of the relay.
Using the front PC interface or the rear service interface, a personal computer can be
connected, to which the information can be sent.
The relay is equipped with several event buffers, for operational messages, circuit
breaker statistics, etc., which are protected against loss of the auxiliary voltage by a
buffer battery. These messages can be displayed on the LCD at any time by selection
via the keypad or transferred to a personal computer via the serial service or PC inter-
face. Readout of messages during operation is described in detail in the SIPROTEC®
4 System Description.
Classification of
Messages
The messages are categorized as follows:
• Operational messages; messages generated while the device is operating: Infor-
mation regarding the status of device functions, measured data, power system
data, control command logs etc.
• Messages of "Statistics": they include a counter for the trip commands initiated by
the device, i.e. reclose commands.
A complete list of all message and output functions with their associated information
number that can be generated by the device with the maximum functional scope can
be found in the Appendix. It also indicates where each indication can be sent to. If
functions are not present in a not fully equipped version of the device, or are config-
ured to Disabled, then the associated indications cannot appear.
Operational Mes-
sages (Buffer:
Event Log)
The operational messages contain information that the device generates during oper-
ation and about operational conditions. Up to 200 operational messages are recorded
in chronological order in the device. New messages are appended at the end of the
list. If the memory is used up, then the oldest message is scrolled out of the list by a
new message.
General
Interrogation
The general interrogation which can be retrieved via DIGSI enables the current status
of the SIPROTEC® 4 device to be read out. All messages requiring general interroga-
tion are displayed with their present value.
Spontaneous
Messages
The spontaneous messages displayed using DIGSI reflect the present status of in-
coming information. Each new incoming message appears immediately, i.e. the user
does not have to wait for an update or initiate one.
2.6.1.3 Information to a Substation Control Centre
If the device has a serial system interface, stored information may additionally be
transferred via this interface to a centralized control and storage device. Transmission
is possible via different transmission protocols.
2 Functions
64 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
2.6.2 Statistics
The number of trips initiated by the 6MD63 as well as the operating hours under load
is counted. The counts are protected against loss of auxiliary supply.
2.6.2.1 Description
Number of Trips In order to count the number of trips of the 6MD63, the position of the circuit breaker
must be monitored via breaker auxiliary contacts and binary inputs of the 6MD63.
Hereby it is necessary that the internal pulse counter is allocated in the matrix to a
binary input that is controlled by the circuit breaker OPEN position. The pulse count
value "Number of TRIPs CB" can be found in the "Statistics" group if the option "Mea-
sured and Metered Values Only" was enabled in the configuration matrix.
Interrupted
Currents
The summation of accumulated currents for faults – general performance of protection
devices – is not applicable for control units. Therefore, no summation is performed in
the 6MD63, though the corresponding statistic counters are displayed in the device
display and DIGSI.
Operating Hours
Counter
The operating hours under load are summed. A current criterion serves to detect the
load status. It is fulfilled when a fixed current threshold (I > 0.04· INom) has been ex-
ceeded in at least one of the three phases.
2.6.2.2 Setting Notes
Reading/Set-
ting/Resetting
Counters
The SIPROTEC® 4 System Description describes how to read out the statistical
counters via the device front panel or DIGSI. Setting or resetting of these statistical
counters takes place under the menu item ANNUNCIATIONS —> STATISTIC by
overwriting the counter values displayed.
2.6.2.3 Information List
No. Information Type of In-
formation
Comments
- #of TRIPs= PMV Number of TRIPs=
409 >BLOCK Op Count SP >BLOCK Op Counter
1020 Op.Hours= VI Counter of operating hours
2.6 Auxiliary Functions
65
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
2.6.3 Measurement
A series of measured values and the values derived from them are permanently avail-
able for call up on site, or for data transfer.
Applications • Information on the actual status of the system
• Conversion from secondary values into primary values and percentages
Prerequisites Apart from the secondary values, the device is able to indicate the primary values and
percentages of the measured values.
A precondition for correct display of the primary and percentage values is complete
and correct entry of the nominal values for the instrument transformers and the pro-
tected equipment as well as current and voltage transformer ratios in the ground paths
when configuring the device. The following table shows the formulas which are the
basis for the conversion from secondary values into primary values and percentages.
2.6.3.1 Display of Measured Values
Table 2-5 Conversion formulae between secondary values ad primary/percentage values
Measured Values second-
ary
primary %
IA, IB, IC,
I1, I2
Isec
IN = 3 ·I0
(calculated)
IN sec
IN = measured value
of IN input
IN sec
VA, VB, VC,
V0, V1, V2,
VPh-N sec.
VA–B, VB–C, VC–A VPh-Ph sec.
VN VN sec.
P, Q, S (P and Q
phase-segregated)
No secondary measured values
2 Functions
66 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Table 2-6 Legend for the conversion formulae
Depending on the type of device ordered and the device connections, some of the op-
erating measured values listed below may not be available. The phase–to–ground
voltages are either measured directly, if the voltage inputs are connected phase–to–
ground, or they are calculated from the phase–to–phase voltages VA–B and VB–C and
the displacement voltage VN.
The displacement voltage VN is either measured directly or calculated from the phase-
to-ground voltages:
Please note that value V0 is indicated in the operational measured values.
Power Factor
(phase-segregated)
cos ϕcos ϕcos ϕ · 100 in %
frequency f in Hz f in Hz
Measured Values second-
ary
primary %
IA, IB, IC,
I1, I2
Isec
Parameter Address Parameter Address
Vnom PRIMARY 202 Ignd-CT PRIM 217
Vnom SECONDARY 203 Ignd-CT SEC 218
CT PRIMARY 204 FullScaleVolt. 1101
CT SECONDARY 205 FullScaleCurr. 1102
Vph / Vdelta 206
2.6 Auxiliary Functions
67
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
The ground current IN is either measured directly or calculated from the conductor cur-
rents:
2.6.3.2 Inversion of Measured Power Values
If required, different settings can be applied to the "forward" direction for the monitor-
ing functions and the positive direction for the directional values (power, power factor,
work and related min., max., mean and thresholds), calculated in the operational mea-
sured values (see P.System Data 2 and Chapter 4). To do so, set address 1108
P,Q sign to reversed. If the setting is not reversed (default), the positive direc-
tion for the power etc. corresponds to the “forward“ direction for the monitoring func-
tions.
2.6.3.3 Transfer of Measured Values
Measured values can be transferred via the interfaces to a central control and storage
unit.
2.6.3.4 Information List
No. Information Type of In-
formation
Comments
268 Superv.Pressure OUT Supervision Pressure
269 Superv.Temp. OUT Supervision Temperature
601 Ia = MV Ia
602 Ib = MV Ib
603 Ic = MV Ic
604 In = MV In
605 I1 = MV I1 (positive sequence)
606 I2 = MV I2 (negative sequence)
621 Va = MV Va
622 Vb = MV Vb
623 Vc = MV Vc
624 Va-b= MV Va-b
625 Vb-c= MV Vb-c
626 Vc-a= MV Vc-a
627 VN = MV VN
629 V1 = MV V1 (positive sequence)
630 V2 = MV V2 (negative sequence)
641 P = MV P (active power)
642 Q = MV Q (reactive power)
644 Freq= MV Frequency
2 Functions
68 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
2.6.4 Average Measurements
Long-term averages are calculated and output by the 6md63.
2.6.4.1 Description
Long-term
Averages
The long-term averages of the three phase currents Ix, the positive sequence compo-
nent I1 of the three phase currents, and the real power P, reactive power Q, and ap-
parent power S are calculated and memorized. Averages are indicated in primary
values.
For the long-term averages mentioned above, the length of the time window for aver-
aging and the frequency with which it is updated can be set. The associated minimum
and maximum values can be reset, using binary inputs or by using the integrated
control panel in the DIGSI operating program.
The values are updated in intervals of > 0.3 s and < 1 s.
645 S = MV S (apparent power)
831 3Io = MV 3Io (zero sequence)
832 Vo = MV Vo (zero sequence)
901 PF = MV Power Factor
991 Press = MVU Pressure
992 Temp = MVU Temperature
996 Td1= MV Transducer 1
997 Td2= MV Transducer 2
1068 Θ RTD 1 = MV Temperature of RTD 1
1069 Θ RTD 2 = MV Temperature of RTD 2
1070 Θ RTD 3 = MV Temperature of RTD 3
1071 Θ RTD 4 = MV Temperature of RTD 4
1072 Θ RTD 5 = MV Temperature of RTD 5
1073 Θ RTD 6 = MV Temperature of RTD 6
1074 Θ RTD 7 = MV Temperature of RTD 7
1075 Θ RTD 8 = MV Temperature of RTD 8
1076 Θ RTD 9 = MV Temperature of RTD 9
1077 Θ RTD10 = MV Temperature of RTD10
1078 Θ RTD11 = MV Temperature of RTD11
1079 Θ RTD12 = MV Temperature of RTD12
No. Information Type of In-
formation
Comments
2.6 Auxiliary Functions
69
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
2.6.4.2 Setting Notes
Average
Calculation
The selection of the time period for measured value averaging is set with parameter
8301 DMD Interval at MEASUREMENT. The first number specifies the averaging
time window in minutes while the second number gives the number of subdivisions of
updates within the time window. 15 Min., 3 Subs, for example, means: Time
average generation occurs for all measured values that arrive within 15 minutes. The
output is updated every 15/3 = 5 minutes.
With address 8302 DMD Sync.Time, the starting time for the averaging window set
under address 8301 is determined. This setting determines if the window should start
on the hour (On The Hour) or 15 minutes later (15 After Hour) or 30 minutes /
45 minutes after the hour ( 30 After Hour 45 After Hour).
If the settings for averaging are changed, then the measured values stored in the
buffer are deleted, and new results for the average calculation are only available after
the set time period has passed.
2.6.4.3 Settings
2.6.4.4 Information List
Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments
8301 DMD Interval 15 Min., 1 Sub
15 Min., 3 Subs
15 Min.,15 Subs
30 Min., 1 Sub
60 Min., 1 Sub
60 Min.,10 Subs
5 Min., 5 Subs
60 Min., 1 Sub Demand Calculation Intervals
8302 DMD Sync.Time On The Hour
15 After Hour
30 After Hour
45 After Hour
On The Hour Demand Synchronization Time
No. Information Type of In-
formation
Comments
833 I1 dmd= MV I1 (positive sequence) Demand
834 P dmd = MV Active Power Demand
835 Q dmd = MV Reactive Power Demand
836 S dmd = MV Apparent Power Demand
963 Ia dmd= MV I A demand
964 Ib dmd= MV I B demand
965 Ic dmd= MV I C demand
2 Functions
70 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
2.6.5 Min/Max Measurement Setup
Minimum and maximum values are calculated by the device and can be read out with
the point of time (date and time of the last update).
2.6.5.1 Description
Minimum and
Maximum Values
The minimum and maximum values for the three phase currents Ix, the three phase-
to-ground voltages Vx-g, the three phase-to-phase voltages Vxy, the positive sequence
components I1 and V1, the displacement voltage V0, the real power P, reactive power
Q, and apparent power S, the frequency, and the power factor cos ϕ, primary values
are recorded including the date and time they were last updated.
Additionally, minimum and maximum values for the long-term averages, including also
the date and time they were last updated, are made available in primary values.
The values are updated in intervals of > 0.3 s and < 1 s.
The minimum and maximum values are listed with the date and time of the latest
update. Using binary inputs, operating via the integrated control panel or the operating
program DIGSI 4, the maximum and minimum values can be reset. In addition, the
reset can also take place cyclically, beginning with a pre-selected point in time.
2.6.5.2 Setting Notes
Minimum and
Maximum Values
The tracking of minimum and maximum values can be reset automatically at a pro-
grammable point in time. To select this feature, address 8311 MinMax cycRESET
should be set to YES. The point in time when reset is to take place (the minute of the
day in which reset will take place) is set at address 8312 MiMa RESET TIME. The
reset cycle in days is entered at address 8313 MiMa RESETCYCLE, and the beginning
date of the cyclical process, from the time of the setting procedure (in days), is entered
at address 8314 MinMaxRES.START.
2.6.5.3 Settings
Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments
8311 MinMax cycRESET NO
YES
YES Automatic Cyclic Reset Function
8312 MiMa RESET TIME 0 .. 1439 min 0 min MinMax Reset Timer
8313 MiMa RESETCYCLE 1 .. 365 Days 7 Days MinMax Reset Cycle Period
8314 MinMaxRES.START 1 .. 365 Days 1 Days MinMax Start Reset Cycle in
2.6 Auxiliary Functions
71
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
2.6.5.4 Information List
No. Information Type of In-
formation
Comments
395 >I MinMax Reset SP >I MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
396 >I1 MiMaReset SP >I1 MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
397 >V MiMaReset SP >V MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
398 >VphphMiMaRes SP >Vphph MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
399 >V1 MiMa Reset SP >V1 MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
400 >P MiMa Reset SP >P MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
401 >S MiMa Reset SP >S MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
402 >Q MiMa Reset SP >Q MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
403 >Idmd MiMaReset SP >Idmd MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
404 >Pdmd MiMaReset SP >Pdmd MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
405 >Qdmd MiMaReset SP >Qdmd MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
406 >Sdmd MiMaReset SP >Sdmd MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
407 >Frq MiMa Reset SP >Frq. MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
408 >PF MiMaReset SP >Power Factor MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
837 IAdmdMin MVT I A Demand Minimum
838 IAdmdMax MVT I A Demand Maximum
839 IBdmdMin MVT I B Demand Minimum
840 IBdmdMax MVT I B Demand Maximum
841 ICdmdMin MVT I C Demand Minimum
842 ICdmdMax MVT I C Demand Maximum
843 I1dmdMin MVT I1 (positive sequence) Demand Minimum
844 I1dmdMax MVT I1 (positive sequence) Demand Maximum
845 PdMin= MVT Active Power Demand Minimum
846 PdMax= MVT Active Power Demand Maximum
847 QdMin= MVT Reactive Power Minimum
848 QdMax= MVT Reactive Power Maximum
849 SdMin= MVT Apparent Power Minimum
850 SdMax= MVT Apparent Power Maximum
851 Ia Min= MVT Ia Min
852 Ia Max= MVT Ia Max
853 Ib Min= MVT Ib Min
854 Ib Max= MVT Ib Max
855 Ic Min= MVT Ic Min
856 Ic Max= MVT Ic Max
857 I1 Min= MVT I1 (positive sequence) Minimum
858 I1 Max= MVT I1 (positive sequence) Maximum
859 Va-nMin= MVT Va-n Min
860 Va-nMax= MVT Va-n Max
861 Vb-nMin= MVT Vb-n Min
862 Vb-nMax= MVT Vb-n Max
863 Vc-nMin= MVT Vc-n Min
864 Vc-nMax= MVT Vc-n Max
865 Va-bMin= MVT Va-b Min
867 Va-bMax= MVT Va-b Max
2 Functions
72 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
2.6.6 Set Points for Measured Values
SIPROTEC® devices allow limit points (set points) to be set for some measured and
metered values. If, during operation, a value reaches one of these set-points, the
device generates an alarm which is indicated as an operational message. This can be
configured to LEDs and/or binary outputs, transferred via the ports and interconnected
in DIGSI® CFC. In addition you can use DIGSI® CFC to configure set points for further
measured and metered values and allocate these via the DIGSI® device matrix. In
contrast to the actual protection functions of a protection device the limit value moni-
toring function operates in the background; therefore it may not pick up if measured
values are changed spontaneously in the event of a fault and if protection functions
are picked up. Furthermore, since a message is only issued when the set point limit is
repeatedly exceeded, the set point monitoring functions do not react as fast as protec-
tion functions trip signals.
Applications • This monitoring scheme operates in the background and uses multiple repeated
measurements. Before de-energization, as the case may be, is provoked by exter-
nal protection devices, the scheme may not pick up when measured values are sud-
denly changed due to a fault.
868 Vb-cMin= MVT Vb-c Min
869 Vb-cMax= MVT Vb-c Max
870 Vc-aMin= MVT Vc-a Min
871 Vc-aMax= MVT Vc-a Max
872 Vn Min = MVT V neutral Min
873 Vn Max = MVT V neutral Max
874 V1 Min = MVT V1 (positive sequence) Voltage Minimum
875 V1 Max = MVT V1 (positive sequence) Voltage Maximum
876 Pmin= MVT Active Power Minimum
877 Pmax= MVT Active Power Maximum
878 Qmin= MVT Reactive Power Minimum
879 Qmax= MVT Reactive Power Maximum
880 Smin= MVT Apparent Power Minimum
881 Smax= MVT Apparent Power Maximum
882 fmin= MVT Frequency Minimum
883 fmax= MVT Frequency Maximum
884 PF Max= MVT Power Factor Maximum
885 PF Min= MVT Power Factor Minimum
No. Information Type of In-
formation
Comments
2.6 Auxiliary Functions
73
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
2.6.6.1 Description
Limit Value
Monitoring
Ex works, the following individual set point levels are configured:
•IAdmd>: Exceeding a preset maximum average value in Phase A;
•IBdmd>: Exceeding a preset maximum average value in Phase B;
•ICdmd>: Exceeding a preset maximum average value in Phase C;
•I1dmd>: Exceeding a preset maximum average of the positive sequence current;
•|Pdmd|>: Exceeding a preset maximum average active power.
•|Qdmd|>: Exceeding a preset maximum average reactive power;
•Sdmd>: Exceeding a preset maximum average of the apparent power;
•Temp>: Exceeding a preset temperature (if measuring transducer available);
•Pressure<: Falling below a preset pressure (if measuring transducer available);
•IL<: Falling below a preset current in any phase;
•|cosϕ |<: Falling below a preset power factor.
2.6.6.2 Setting Notes
Set Points Setting is performed in the DIGSI configuration Matrix under Settings, Masking I/O
(Configuration Matrix). Set the filter "Measured and Metered Values Only" and select
the configuration group "Set Points (MV)". Here, default settings may be changed or
new set points defined.
Settings must be applied in percent and usually refer to nominal values of the device.
2.6.6.3 Information List
No. Information Type of In-
formation
Comments
- I Admd> LV I A dmd>
- I Bdmd> LV I B dmd>
- I Cdmd> LV I C dmd>
- I1dmd> LV I1dmd>
- |Pdmd|> LV |Pdmd|>
- |Qdmd|> LV |Qdmd|>
- |Sdmd|> LV |Sdmd|>
- Press< LVU Pressure<
- Temp> LVU Temp>
- 37-1 LV 37-1 under current
- |PF|< LV |Power Factor|<
270 SP. Pressure< OUT Set Point Pressure<
271 SP. Temp> OUT Set Point Temp>
273 SP. I A dmd> OUT Set Point Phase A dmd>
274 SP. I B dmd> OUT Set Point Phase B dmd>
275 SP. I C dmd> OUT Set Point Phase C dmd>
276 SP. I1dmd> OUT Set Point positive sequence I1dmd>
277 SP. |Pdmd|> OUT Set Point |Pdmd|>
278 SP. |Qdmd|> OUT Set Point |Qdmd|>
2 Functions
74 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
2.6.7 Set Points for Statistic
2.6.7.1 Description
For the statistical counters, limit values may be entered and a message is generated
as soon as they are reached. The message can be allocated to both output relays and
LEDs.
2.6.7.2 Setting Notes
Setting/Resetting Set-points for the statistic counter are entered in the DIGSI menu item Annunciation
→ Statistic into the submenu Set Points for Statistic. Double-click to display the cor-
responding contents in another window. By overwriting the previous value you can
change the settings (please refer to the SIPROTEC 4 System Description).
2.6.7.3 Information List
279 SP. |Sdmd|> OUT Set Point |Sdmd|>
284 SP. 37-1 alarm OUT Set Point 37-1 Undercurrent alarm
285 SP. PF(55)alarm OUT Set Point 55 Power factor alarm
No. Information Type of In-
formation
Comments
No. Information Type of In-
formation
Comments
- OpHour> LV Operating hours greater than
272 SP. Op Hours> OUT Set Point Operating Hours
2.6 Auxiliary Functions
75
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
2.6.8 Energy Metering
Metered values for active and reactive energy are determined by the device. They can
be called up at the front of the device, read out via the operating interface using a PC
with DIGSI, or transferred to a central master station via the system interface.
2.6.8.1 Description
Metered Values for
Active and Reactive
Energy
Metered values of the real power Wp and reactive power (Wq) are acquired in kilowatt,
megawatt or gigawatt hours primary or in kVARh, MVARh or GVARh primary, sepa-
rately according to the input (+) and output (–), or capacitive and inductive. The mea-
sured-value resolution can be configured. The signs of the measured values depend
on the setting of address 1108 P,Q sign.
2.6.8.2 Setting Notes
Meter Resolution
Settings
Parameter 8315 MeterResolution can be used to maximize the resolution of the
metered energy values by Factor 10 or Factor 100 compared to the Standard
setting.
2.6.8.3 Settings
2.6.8.4 Information List
Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments
8315 MeterResolution Standard
Factor 10
Factor 100
Standard Meter resolution
No. Information Type of In-
formation
Comments
- Meter res IntSP_Ev Reset meter
888 Wp(puls) PMV Pulsed Energy Wp (active)
889 Wq(puls) PMV Pulsed Energy Wq (reactive)
924 WpForward MVMV Wp Forward
925 WqForward MVMV Wq Forward
928 WpReverse MVMV Wp Reverse
929 WqReverse MVMV Wq Reverse
2 Functions
76 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
2.6.9 Commissioning Aids
Device data sent to a central or master computer system during test mode or commis-
sioning can be influenced. There are tools for testing the system interface and the
binary inputs and outputs of the device.
Applications • Test Mode
• Commissioning
Prerequisites To be able to use the commissioning aids described below, the following must apply:
– The device must be equipped with an interface;
– The device has to be connected to a control center.
2.6.9.1 Description
Test Messages to
the SCADA Inter-
face during Test
Operation
If the device is connected to a central or main computer system via the SCADA inter-
face, then the information that is transmitted can be influenced.
Depending on the type of protocol, all messages and measured values transferred to
the central control system can be identified with an added message "test operation"-
bit while the device is being tested on site (test mode). This identification prevents the
messages from being incorrectly interpreted as resulting from an actual power system
disturbance or event. As another option, all messages and measured values normally
transferred via the system interface can be blocked during the testing ("block data
transmission").
Data transmission block can be accomplished by controlling binary inputs, by using
the operating panel on the device, or with a PC and DIGSI via the operator interface.
The SIPROTEC 4 System Description describes in detail how to activate and deacti-
vate test mode and blocked data transmission.
Checking the
System Interface
If the device features a system port and uses it to communicate with the control center,
the DIGSI device operation can be used to test if messages are transmitted correctly.
A dialog box shows the display texts of all messages which were allocated to the
system interface in the configuration matrix. In another column of the dialog box you
can specify a value for the messages you intend to test (e.g. ON/OFF). Having entered
password no. 6 (for hardware test menus) a message can then be generated. The cor-
responding message is issued and can be read out either from the event log of the
SIPROTEC 4 device or from the substation control system.
The procedure is described in detail in Chapter "Mounting and Commissioning".
2.6 Auxiliary Functions
77
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Checking the
Binary Inputs and
Outputs
The binary inputs, outputs, and LEDs of a SIPROTEC 4 device can be individually and
precisely controlled in DIGSI. This feature can be used, for example, to verify control
wiring from the device to substation equipment (operational checks), during start-up.
A dialog box shows all binary inputs and outputs and LEDs of the device with their
present status. The operating equipment, commands, or messages that are config-
ured (masked) to the hardware components are displayed also. After entering pass-
word no. 6 (for hardware test menus), it is possible to switch to the opposite status in
another column of the dialog box. Thus, you can energize every single output relay to
check the wiring between 6MD63 and the system without having to create the alarm
allocated to it.
The procedure is described in detail in Chapter "Mounting and Commissioning".
■
2 Functions
78 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
796MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Mounting and Commissioning 3
This chapter is intended for experienced commissioning staff. The staff must be
familiar with the commissioning of protection and control systems, with the manage-
ment of power systems and with the relevant safety rules and guidelines. Hardware
modifications that might be needed in certain cases are explained. The primary tests
require the protected object (line, transformer, etc.) to carry load.
3.1 Mounting and Connections 80
3.2 Checking Connections 107
3.3 Commissioning 112
3.4 Final Preparation of the Device 122
3 Mounting and Commissioning
80 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
3.1 Mounting and Connections
General
WARNING!
Warning of improper transport, storage, installation, and application of the
device.
Non-observance of these precautions can result in death, personal injury or serial ma-
terial damage.
Trouble free and safe use of this device depends on proper transport, storage, instal-
lation, and application of the device according to the warnings in this instruction
manual.
Of particular importance are the general installation and safety regulations for work in
a high-voltage environment (for example, ANSI, IEC, EN, DIN, or other national and
international regulations). These regulations must be observed.
3.1.1 Configuration Information
Prerequisites For installation and connections the following conditions must be met:
The rated device data has been tested as recommended in the SIPROTEC® System
Description /1/. The compliance with these data is verified with the Power System
Data.
C o n n e c t i o n s Terminal assignments are shown in Appendix A.2. Connection examples for current
and voltage transformer circuits are provided in Appendix, Section A.3. The device can
either be connected with three phase-ground voltages (connection mode VT
Connect. 3ph = Van, Vbn, Vcn), or with two phase-phase voltages and Vdelta
(also called the displacement voltage) from open delta VTs as (connection mode VT
Connect. 3ph = Vab, Vbc, VGnd). For the latter, only two phase-phase voltages
or the displacement voltage Vdelta can be connected. In the device settings, the appro-
priate voltage connection must be entered in address 213, in P.System Data 1.
Since the voltage inputs of the 6MD63 device have an operating range from 0 to 170
V, this means that phase-to-phase voltages can be assessed in connection of phase-
to-ground voltages up to √3 · 170 V = 294 V, in the second case up to 170 V.
Binary Inputs and
Outputs
The configuration options of the binary inputs and outputs, i.e. the individual adapta-
tion to the system conditions is described in the SIPROTEC® System Description /1/.
The connections to the system are dependent on this actual configuration. The default
settings of the device are listed in Appendix A, Section A.5. Check also whether the
labelling corresponds to the allocated message functions.
3.1 Mounting and Connections
81
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
3.1.2 Hardware Modifications
3.1.2.1 General
Hardware modifications concerning, for instance, nominal currents, the control voltage
for binary inputs or termination of serial interfaces might be necessary. Follow the pro-
cedure described in this section, whenever hardware modifications are done.
Power Supply
Voltage
There are different power supply voltage ranges for the auxiliary voltage (refer to the
Ordering Information in Appendix A.1). The power supplies of the variants for DC
60/110/125 V and DC 110/125/220 V, AC 115/230 V are largely interchangeable by
modifying the position of the jumpers. The assignment of these jumpers to the nominal
voltage ranges and their spatial arrangement on the PCB are described in Section
3.1.2.3. Location and ratings of the miniature fuse and the buffer battery are also
shown. When the relays are delivered, these jumpers are set according to the name-
plate sticker. Generally, they need not be altered.
Live Status Contact The life contact of devices 6MD63 is a changeover contact, i.e. either the NC position
or the NO position can be connected to the device terminals via a jumper (X40). The
assignment of the jumpers to the contact type and the spatial arrangement of the
jumper are described in Section 3.1.2.3.
Nominal
Cu r r ents
The input transformers of the devices are set to a nominal current of 1 A or 5 A by
burden switching. Jumpers are set according to the name-plate sticker. The assign-
ment of the jumpers to the nominal current and the spatial arrangement of the jumpers
are described in Section 3.1.2.3.
Jumpers X61, X62 and X63 must be set for the same nominal current, i.e. there must
be one jumper for each input transformer, and the common jumper X 60.
Jumper X64 for the ground path is set to 1 A or 5 A (depending on the ordered variant)
irrespective of the other jumper positions.
Note
If nominal current ratings are changed exceptionally, then the new ratings must be reg-
istered in addresses 205 CT SECONDARY/218 Ignd-CT SEC in the Power System
Data (see Subsection 2.1.2.2).
Control Voltage for
B i n a r y I n p u t s
When the device is delivered from the factory, the binary inputs are set to operate with
a voltage that corresponds to the rated DC voltage of the power supply. In general, to
optimize the operation of the inputs, the pick-up voltage of the inputs should be set to
most closely match the actual control voltage being used.
A jumper position is changed to adjust the pickup voltage of a binary input. The as-
signment of the jumpers to the binary inputs and their spatial arrangement are de-
scribed in the following sections.
3 Mounting and Commissioning
82 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Exchanging
I n t e r f a c e s
Only serial interfaces of devices for panel and cubicle flush mounting as well as of
mounting devices with detached operator panel or without operator panel are ex-
changeable. Which interfaces can be exchanged, and how this is done, is described
in Subsection 3.1.2.4 under the margin heading “Exchanging Interface Modules”.
Configuration
RS232/RS485
When the device is delivered from the factory, the serial interfaces are matched to the
ordered version according to the 11th and 12th figure of the ordering code of the
device (or to the additional information of the ordering code). The configuration to a
RS232 or RS485 interface is determined by jumpers on the interface module. The
physical arrangement of the jumpers is described in Subsection 3.1.2.4, under the
margin heading “RS232 Interface” and “RS485/RS232/Profibus”.
Configuration IEC
61850 Ethernet
(EN 100)
The interface module does not feature any jumpers. Its use does not require any hard-
ware adaptations.
Terminating of
S e r i a l I n t e r f a c e s
If the device is equipped with a serial RS485 interface or PROFIBUS, they must be
terminated with resistors at the last device on the bus to ensure reliable data transmis-
sion. Therefore the RS485 or PROFIBUS interface module are provided with terminat-
ing resistors that can be connected to the system by means of jumpers. The physical
arrangement of the jumpers on the interface modules is described in Subsection
3.1.2.4 under the margin heading “RS485/RS232/Profibus” and “PROFIBUS
(FMS/DP) DNP3.0/Modbus”. Both jumpers must always be plugged identically.
As delivered from the factory, the resistors are switched out.
S p a r e P a r t s Spare parts can be the buffer battery that provides for storage of the data in the
battery-buffered RAM when the supply voltage fails, and the miniature fuse of the in-
ternal power supply. Their spatial position is shown in the figures of the processor
boards (Figure 3-3 and 3-4). The ratings of the fuse are printed on the board next the
fuse itself. When exchanging the battery or the fuse, please observe the information
in the /1/, Chapter “Maintenance” and “Corrective Action / Repairs”.
3.1 Mounting and Connections
83
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
3.1.2.2 Disassembly
Disassembly of the
Device
Note
It is assumed for the following steps that the device is not operative.
Work on the Printed
Circuit Boards
Caution!
Caution when changing jumper settings that affect nominal values of the device
As a consequence, the ordering number (MLFB) and the ratings that are stated on the
nameplate do no longer match the actual device properties.
If such changes are necessary, the changes should be clearly and fully noted on the
device. Self adhesive stickers are available that can be used as replacement name-
plates.
To perform work on the printed circuit boards, such as checking or moving switching
elements or exchanging modules, proceed as follows:
• Prepare the working area. Provide a grounded mat for protecting components
subject to damage from electrostatic discharges (ESD). The following equipment is
needed:
– screwdriver with a 5 to 6 mm wide tip,
– a Philips screwdriver size 1,
– 5 mm socket or nut driver.
• Unfasten the screw-posts of the D-subminiature connectors on the back panel at
location “A” and/or “C”. This is not necessary if the device is designed for surface
mounting.
• If the device has more communication interfaces at locations “A”, “C” and/or “B” on
the rear, the screws located diagonally to the interfaces must be removed. This is
not necessary if the device is designed for surface mounting.
• Remove the four or six caps on the front cover and loosen the screws that become
accessible.
• Carefully take off the front cover. With device versions with a detached operator
panel it is possible to remove the front cover of the device right after having un-
screwed all screws.
3 Mounting and Commissioning
84 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Work on the Plug
Connectors
Caution!
Mind electrostatic discharges
Non–observance can result in minor personal injury or property damage.
When handling with plug connectors, electrostatic discharges may emerge by previ-
ously touching an earthed metal surface must be avoided.
Do not plug or withdraw interface connections under power!
When performing work on plug connectors, proceed as follows:
• Disconnect the ribbon cable between the front cover and the B-CPU board (No. 1
in Figures 3-1 and 3-2) at the front cover side. Press the top latch of the plug con-
nector up and the bottom latch down so that the plug connector of the ribbon cable
is pressed out. This action does not apply to the device version with detached op-
erator panel. However, on the central processor unit B-CPU (No. 1) the 7-pole plug
connector X16 behind the D-subminiture connector and the plug connector of the
ribbon cable (connected to the 68-pole plug connector on the rear side) must be re-
moved.
• Disconnect the ribbon cables between the B–CPU unit (No. 1) and the input/output
printed circuit boards B–I/O (No. 2) and (No. 3).
• Remove the boards and set them on the grounded mat to protect them from ESD
damage. In the case of the device variant for panel surface mounting, please be
aware of the fact that a certain amount of force is required to remove the B-CPU
board due to the existing plug connector.
• Check the jumpers in accordance with Figures 3-3 to 3-6 and the following informa-
tion, and as the case may be change or remove them.
The arrangement of the boards are shown in Figures 3-1 and 3-2.
Board Arrangement
6 M D 6 3
The following figure shows the arrangement of the modules for device 6MD63 with
housing size 1/2. The subsequencing figure illustrates housing size 1/1.
3.1 Mounting and Connections
85
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Figure 3-1 Front view of the 6MD63 with housing size 1/2 after removal of the front cover
(simplified and scaled down)
3 Mounting and Commissioning
86 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Figure 3-2 Front view of the 6MD635 and 6MD636 with housing size 1/1 after removal of the front cover (simplified and
scaled down)
3.1 Mounting and Connections
87
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
3.1.2.3 Switching Elements on the Printed Circuit Boards
Processor Board
B–CPU for
6 M D 6 3 . . . / D D
There are two different releases available of the B–CPU board with a different ar-
rangement and setting of the jumpers. The following figure depicts the layout of the
printed circuit board B-CPU for devices up to release .../DD. The location and ratings
of the miniature fuse (F1) and of the buffer battery (G1) are shown in the following
figure.
Figure 3-3 Processor printed circuit board B–CPU for devices up to release.../DD with jumpers settings required for
the board configuration
For devices up to release 6MD63.../DD the jumpers for the set nominal voltage of the
integrated power supply are checked in accordance with Table 3-1, the quiescent state
of the life contact in accordance with Table 3-2 and the selected pickup voltages of the
binary inputs BI1 through BI7 in accordance with Table 3-3.
3 Mounting and Commissioning
88 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Power Supply There is no 230 VAC power supply available for 6MD63.../DD.
Table 3-1 Jumper settings for nominal voltage of the integrated power supply on the pro-
cessor board B-CPU for 6MD63.../DD.
Life Status
C o n ta c t
Table 3-2 Jumper settings for the quiescent state of the life contact on the B–CPU pro-
cessor PCB for 6MD63.../DD devices.
Pickup voltages of
BI1 to BI7
Table 3-3 Jumper settings for the pickup voltages of binary inputs BI1 to BI7 on the pro-
cessor board B-CPU for 6MD63.../DD
1) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 24 VDC to 125 VDC
2) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 110 VDC to 220 VDC and 115 VAC
Jumper Nominal Voltage
60 to 125 VDC 110 to 250 VDC, 115 VAC 24/48 VDC
X51 1-2 2-3 Jumpers X51 to X53 are not
used
X52 1-2 and 3-4 2-3
X53 1-2 2-3
interchangeable cannot be changed
Jumper Open in the quiescent
state
Closed in the quiescent
state
Presetting
X40 1-2 2-3 2-3
Binary Inputs Jumper 19 VDC Pickup 1) 88 VDC Pickup 2)
BI1 X21 L H
BI2 X22 L H
BI3 X23 L H
BI4 X24 L H
BI5 X25 L H
BI6 X26 L H
BI7 X27 L H
3.1 Mounting and Connections
89
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Processor Board
B–CPU for
6 M D 6 3 . . . / E E
The following figure depicts the layout of the printed circuit board for devices up to
release .../EE. The location and ratings of the miniature fuse (F1) and of the buffer
battery (G1) are shown in the following figure.
Figure 3-4 Processor printed circuit board B–CPU for devices .../EE and higher with jumpers settings required for the
board configuration
For devices of release 6MD63.../EE and higher, the jumpers for the set nominal
voltage of the integrated power supply are checked in accordance with Table 3-4, the
quiescent state of the life contact in accordance with Table 3-5 and the selected control
voltages of binary inputs BI1 through BI7 in accordance with Table 3-6.
3 Mounting and Commissioning
90 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Power Supply There is a 230 VAC power supply available for 6MD63.../EE.
Table 3-4 Jumper settings for the nominal voltage of the integrated power supply on the
processor board B-CPU for 6MD63.../EE.
Life Status
C on ta ct
Table 3-5 Jumper setting for the quiescent state of the life contact on the processor board
B-CPU for devices 6MD63.../EE
Pickup Voltages of
BI1 to BI7
Table 3-6 Jumper settings for the pickup voltages of binary inputs BI1 to BI7 on the pro-
cessor board B-CPU for 6MD63.../EE
1) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 24 VDC to 125 VDC
2) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 220 / 250 VDC and 115/230 VAC
Jumper Nominal Voltage
60/110/125 VDC 220/250 VDC
115/230 VAC
24/48 VDC
X51 1-2 2-3 1-2
X52 1-2 and 3-4 2-3 None
X53 1-2 2-3 None
interchangeable cannot be changed
Jumper Open in the quiescent
state
Closed in the quiescent
state
Presetting
X40 1-2 2-3 2-3
Binary Inputs Jumper 19 VDC Pickup 1) 88 VDC Pickup 2)
BI1 X21 L H
BI2 X22 L H
BI3 X23 L H
BI4 X24 L H
BI5 X25 L H
BI6 X26 L H
BI7 X27 L H
3.1 Mounting and Connections
91
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Input/Output Board
B-I/O-1
The layout of the printed circuit board for the input/output board B–I/O-1 is illustrated
in the following figure.
Figure 3-5 Input/output board B–I/O-1 with representation of the jumper settings required
for the board configuration
The set nominal currents of the current input transformers and the selected operating
voltage of binary inputs BI21 to BI24 according to Table 3-7 are checked. The jumpers
X60 to X63 must all be set to the same nominal current, i.e. one jumper (X61 to X63)
for each input transformer of the phase currents and additionally the common jumper
X60. The jumper X64 determines the nominal current for the input IN and may thus
have a setting that deviates from that of the phase currents.
3 Mounting and Commissioning
92 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Pickup Voltages of
BI21 to BI24
Table 3-7 Jumper settings for the pickup voltages of the binary inputs BI21 to BI24 on
the input/output board B-I/O-1
1) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 24 VDC to 125 VDC
2) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 220 / 250 VDC and 115/230 VAC
B u s A d d r e s s Jumpers X71, X72 and X73 on the B-I/O-1 board serve to set up the bus address. The
jumpers must not be changed. Table 3-8 shows the factory settings for the jumpers.
Table 3-8 Jumper settings input/output board B-I/O-1
Binary Inputs Jumper 19 VDC Pickup 1) 88 VDC Pickup 2)
BI21 X21 L H
BI22 X22 L H
BI23 X23 L H
BI24 X24 L H
Jumper Housing size 1/2 and 1/1
X71 L
X72 H
X73 L
3.1 Mounting and Connections
93
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Input/Output Board
B-I/O-2
The layout of the PCB for the input/output module B–I/O–2 is illustrated in figure 3-6
Figure 3-6 Input/output board B-I/O-2 with representation of the jumper settings required
for the board configuration
The selected pickup voltages of the binary inputs BI8 through BI20, and BI25 through
BI37, are checked in accordance with Table 3-9.
3 Mounting and Commissioning
94 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Control voltages of
Binary Inputs BI8 to
BI20, BI25 to BI37
Table 3-9 Jumper settings for pickup voltages of the binary inputs BI8 to BI20 and BI25
to BI37 on the input/output board B–I/O-2
1) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 24 VDC to 125 VDC
2) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 220 / 250 VDC and 115/230 VAC
B u s A d d r e s s Jumpers X71, X72 and X73 on the B-I/O-2 board serve to set up the bus address. The
jumpers must not be changed. The following table lists the jumper presettings.
Table 3-10 Jumper settings input/output board B-I/O-2
Binary Input Jumper 19 VDC Pickup 1) 88 VDC Pickup 2)
BI8 BI25 X 1-2 2-3
BI9 BI26 X 1-2 2-3
BI10 BI27 X 1-2 2-3
BI11 BI28 X24 1-2 2-3
BI12 BI29 X25 1-2 2-3
BI13 BI30 X26 1-2 2-3
BI14 BI31 X27 1-2 2-3
BI15 BI32 X28 1-2 2-3
BI16 BI33 X29 1-2 2-3
BI17 BI34 X30 1-2 2-3
BI18 BI35 X31 1-2 2-3
BI19 BI36 X32 1-2 2-3
BI20 BI37 X33 1-2 2-3
Jumper Housing size 1/2Housing size 1/1
Mounting location 33 Mounting location 5
X71 2-3 1-2 1-2
X72 1-2 2-3 1-2
X73 1-2 2-3 2-3
3.1 Mounting and Connections
95
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
3.1.2.4 Interface Modules
Exchanging Inter-
f a c e M o d u l e s
The interface modules are located on the processor printed circuit boards B-CPU
(No.1 in Figure 3-1 and 3-2) of the devices 6MD63. The following figure shows the
printed circuit board and the arrangement of the modules.
Figure 3-7 Processor printed circuit board B–CPU with interface modules
3 Mounting and Commissioning
96 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Please note the following:
• Only interface modules of devices with flush-mounting case as well as of mounting
devices with detached operator panel or without operator panel can be exchanged.
Interface modules of devices in surface mounting housings with two-tier terminals
must be exchanged in our manufacturing centre.
• Use only interface modules that can be ordered in our facilities via the order key
(see also Appendix, Section A.1).
• You may have to ensure the termination of the interfaces featuring bus capability
according to margin heading “Termination”.
Table 3-11 Exchangeable interface modules
The order numbers of the exchange modules can be found in the Appendix in Section
A.1, Accessories.
RS232 Interface Interface RS232 can be modified to interface RS485 and vice versa, according to
Figure 3-9.
Figure 3-7 shows the printed circuit board B–CPU and the interface modules.
Figure 3-8 shows the location of the jumpers of interface RS232 on the interface
module.
Surface-mounted devices with fiber optics connection have their fiber optics module
fitted in the console housing. The fiber optics module is controlled via a RS232 inter-
face module at the associated CPU interface slot. For this application type the jumpers
X12 and X13 on the RS232 module are plugged in position 2-3.
Interface Mounting location / inter-
face
Exchange module
System Interface B
RS232
RS 485
FO 820 nm
PROFIBUS FMS RS485
PROFIBUS FMS Double ring
PROFIBUS FMS Single ring
PROFIBUS DP RS485
PROFIBUS DP Double ring
Modbus RS 485
Modbus 820 nm
DNP 3.0 RS 485
DNP 3.0 820 nm
IEC 61850, Ethernet electrical
DIGSI® /Modem Inter-
face/RTD-box C
RS232
RS 485
FO 820 nm
3.1 Mounting and Connections
97
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Figure 3-8 Location of the jumpers for configuration of RS232
Terminating resistors are not required. They are disconnected.
Jumper X11 enables the CTS feature (Clear to Send - flow control), which is impor-
tant for modem communication.
Table 3-12 Jumper setting for CTS (Clear to Send) on the interface board
1) Default Setting
Jumper setting 2-3: The connection to the modem is usually established with star
coupler or fiber-optic converter. Therefore the modem control signals according to
RS232 standard DIN 66020 are not available. Modem signals are not required since
the connection to the SIPROTEC®4 devices is always operated in the half-duplex
mode. Please use connection cable with order number 7XV5100-4.
Jumper setting 2-3 is equally required when using the RTD boxes in half-duplex oper-
ation.
Jumper setting 1-2: This setting makes the modem signals available, i. e. for a direct
RS232 connection between the SIPROTEC® 4 device and the modem. This setting
can be selected optionally. We recommend to use a standard RS232 modem connec-
tion cable (converter 9-pin to 25-pin).
Note
For a direct connection to DIGSI ® with interface RS232, jumper X11 must be plugged
in position 2-3.
Jumper /CTS from interface RS232 /CTS controlled by /RTS
X11 1-2 2-3 1)
3 Mounting and Commissioning
98 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
RS485 Interface Interface RS485 can be modified to interface RS232 and vice versa (see Figures 3-8
and 3-9).
The following figure shows the location of the jumpers of interface RS485 on the inter-
face module.
Figure 3-9 Position of terminating resistors and the plug-in jumpers for configuration of the
RS485 interface
PROFIBUS
(FMS/DP)
DNP3.0/Modbus
Figure 3-10 Position of the plug-in jumpers for the configuration of the terminating resistors at the Profibus (FMS and
DP), DNP 3.0 and Modbus interfaces.
IEC 61850 Ethernet
(EN 100)
The interface module does not feature any jumpers. Its use does not require any hard-
ware adaptations.
Termination For bus-capable interfaces a termination is necessary at the bus for each last device,
i.e. termination resistors must be connected.
The terminating resistors are located on the RS485 or PROFIBUS (FMS/DP) and
DNP3.0 and Modbus interface module that is mounted to the processor module B–
CPU (No. 1 in Figure 3-1 and 3-2).
3.1 Mounting and Connections
99
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
With default setting, jumpers are plugged in such a way that terminating resistors are
disconnected. For the configuration of the terminating resistors both jumpers have to
be plugged in the same way.
The terminating resistors can also be connected externally (e.g. to the terminal block).
In this case, the terminating resistors located on the RS485 or PROFIBUS interface
module must be switched off.
Figure 3-11 Termination of the RS485 interface (external)
3.1.2.5 Reassembly
To reassemble the device, proceed as follows:
• Carefully insert the boards into the case. The mounting locations are shown in
Figures 3-1 and 3-2. For the model of the device designed for surface mounting,
use the metal lever to insert the processor board B-CPU. The installation is easier
with the lever.
• First plug the plug connectors of the ribbon cable into the input/output boards B-I/O
and then onto the processor board B-CPU. Do not bend any connector pins! Do not
use force!
• Insert the plug connector of the ribbon cable between the processor board CPU and
the front cover into the socket of the front cover. This action does not apply to the
device version with detached operator panel. Instead the plug connector of the
ribbon cable connected to a 68-pole plug connector on the rear side of the device
must be plugged into the plug connector of the processor circuit board B–CPU. The
7-pole X16 connector belonging to the ribbon cable must be plugged behind the D-
subminiature female connector. The plugging position is not relevant in this context
as the connection is protected against polarity reversal.
• Press the latches of the plug connectors together.
• Replace the front cover and secure to the housing with the screws.
• Mount the covers.
• Re-fasten the interfaces on the rear of the device housing. This activity is not nec-
essary if the device is designed for surface mounting.
3 Mounting and Commissioning
100 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
3.1.3 Installation
3.1.3.1 Panel Flush Mounting
Depending on the version, the device housing can be 1/2 or 1/1. For the 1/3 housing
size (Figure 3-12), there are 4 covers and 4 holes. For the 1/1 housing size (Figure 3-
13) there are 6 covers and 6 holes.
• Remove the 4 covers at the corners of the front cover, for size 1/1 the 2 covers
located centrally at the top and bottom also have to be removed. Thus the 4 respec-
tively 6 slots in the mounting flange are revealed and can be accessed.
• Insert the device into the panel cut-out and fasten it with four or six screws. For di-
mensions refer to Section 4.6.
• Mount the four or six covers.
• Connect the ground on the rear plate of the device to the protective ground of the
panel. Using at least one M4 screw. The cross-sectional area of the ground wire
must be equal to the cross-sectional area of any other control conductor connected
to the device. The cross-section of the ground wire must be at least 2.5 mm 2.
• Connections are realized via the plug terminals or screw terminals on the rear side
of the device in accordance to the circuit diagram. When using forked lugs for direct
connections or screw terminal, the screws, before having inserted the lugs and
wires, must be tightened in such a way that the screw heads are even with the ter-
minal block. A ring lug must be centered in the connection chamber, in such a way
that the screw thread fits in the hole of the lug. Section /1/ has pertinent information
regarding wire size, lugs, bending radii, etc.
Figure 3-12 Panel flush mounting of a 6MD63 (housing size 1/2)
3.1 Mounting and Connections
101
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Figure 3-13 Panel flush mounting of a 6MD63 (housing size 1/1)
3 Mounting and Commissioning
102 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
3.1.3.2 Rack Mounting and Cubicle Mounting
To install the device in a frame or cubicle, two mounting brackets are required. The
ordering codes are stated in the Appendix, Section A.1.
For the 1/2 housing size (Figure 3-14) there are 4 covers and 4 holes. For the 1/1
housing size (Figure 3-15) there are 6 covers and 6 holes.
• Loosely screw the two mounting brackets in the rack or cubicle with four screws.
• Remove the 4 covers at the corners of the front cover, for size 1/1 the 2 covers
located centrally at the top and bottom also have to be removed. Thus the 4 respec-
tively 6 elongated holes in the mounting flange are revealed and can be accessed.
• Fasten the device to the mounting brackets with four or six screws.
• Mount the four or six covers.
• Tighten the mounting brackets to the rack or cubicle using eight screws.
• Connect the ground on the rear plate of the device to the protective ground of the
panel. Using at least one M4 screw. The cross-sectional area of the ground wire
must be equal to the cross-sectional area of any other control conductor connected
to the device. The cross-section of the ground wire must be at least 2.5 mm 2.
• Connections are realized via the plug terminals or screw terminals on the rear side
of the device in accordance to the circuit diagram. When using forked lugs for direct
connections or screw terminal, the screws, before having inserted the lugs and
wires, must be tightened in such a way that the screw heads are even with the ter-
minal block. A ring lug must be centered in the connection chamber, in such a way
that the screw thread fits in the hole of the lug. The SIPROTEC® System Description
/1/ has pertinent information regarding wire size, lugs, bending radii, etc.
Figure 3-14 Installing a 6MD63 in a rack or cubicle (housing size 1/2)
3.1 Mounting and Connections
103
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Figure 3-15 Installing a 6MD63 in a rack or cubicle (housing size 1/1)
3.1.3.3 Panel Surface Mounting
For panel surface mounting of the device proceed as follows:
• Secure the device to the panel with four screws. For dimensions refer to Section
4.6.
• Connect the ground of the device to the protective ground of the panel. The cross-
sectional area of the ground wire must be equal to the cross-sectional area of any
other control conductor connected to the device. The cross-section of the ground
wire must be at least 2.5 mm 2.
• Connect solid, low-impedance operational grounding (cross-sectional area = 2.5
mm2) to the grounding surface on the side. Use at least one M4 screw for the device
ground.
• Connections according to the circuit diagram via screw terminals, connections for
optical fibres and electrical communication modules via the inclined housings. The
SIPROTEC® System Description /1/ has pertinent information regarding wire size,
lugs, bending radii, etc.
3 Mounting and Commissioning
104 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
3.1.3.4 Mounting with Detached Operator Panel
Caution!
Be careful when removing or plugging the connector between device and de-
tached operator panel
Non–observance of the following measure can result in property damage. Without the
cable the device is not ready for operation!
Do never pull or plug the connector between the device and the detached operator
panel during operation while the device is alive!
For mounting the device proceed as follows:
• Fasten device of housing size 1/2 with 6 screws and device of housing size 1/1 with
10 screws. For dimensions refer to Section 4.6.
• Connect the ground on the rear plate of the device to the protective ground of the
panel. Using at least one M4 screw. The cross-sectional area of the ground wire
must be equal to the cross-sectional area of any other control conductor connected
to the device. The cross-section of the ground wire must be at least 2.5 mm 2.
• Connections are realized via the plug terminals or screw terminals on the rear side
of the device according to the circuit diagram. When using forked lugs for direct con-
nections or screw terminal, the screws, before having inserted the lugs and wires,
must be tightened in such a way that the screw heads are even with the terminal
block. A ring lug must be centered in the connection chamber, in such a way that
the screw thread fits in the hole of the lug. The SIPROTEC® System Description /1/
has pertinent information regarding wire size, lugs, bending radii, etc.
For mounting the operator panel please observe the following:
• Remove the 4 covers on the corners of the front plate. This exposes the 4 elongated
holes in the mounting bracket.
• Insert the operator panel into the panel cut-out and fasten with four screws. For di-
mensions refer to Section 4.6.
• Replace the 4 covers.
• Connect the ground on the rear plate of the operator control element to the protec-
tive ground of the panel using at least one M4 screw. The cross-sectional area of
the ground wire must be equal to the cross-sectional area of any other control con-
ductor connected to the device. The cross-section of the ground wire must be at
least 2.5 mm 2.
• Connect the operator panel to the device. Furthermore, plug the 68-pin connector
of the cable belonging to the operator panel into the corresponding connection at
the rear side of the device (see SIPROTEC® System Description /1/).
3.1 Mounting and Connections
105
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
3.1.3.5 Mounting without Operator Panel
For mounting the device proceed as follows:
• Fasten device of housing size 1/2 with 6 screws and device of housing size 1/1 with
10 screws. For dimensions refer to Section 4.6.
• Connect the ground on the rear plate of the device to the protective ground of the
panel. Using at least one M4 screw. The cross-sectional area of the ground wire
must be equal to the cross-sectional area of any other control conductor connected
to the device. The cross-section of the ground wire must be at least 2.5 mm 2.
• Connections are realized via the plug terminals or screw terminals on the rear side
of the device in accordance to the circuit diagram. When using forked lugs for direct
connections or screw terminal, the screws, before having inserted the lugs and
wires, must be tightened in such a way that the screw heads are even with the ter-
minal block. A ring lug must be centered in the connection chamber, in such a way
that the screw thread fits in the hole of the lug. The SIPROTEC® System Description
provides information on wire size, lugs, bending radii, etc. which must be observed.
Caution!
Be careful when pulling or plugging the dongle cable
Non–observance of the following measures can result in minor personal injury or prop-
erty damage:
Never pull or plug the dongle cable while the device is alive! Without the cable the
device is not ready for operation!
The connector of the dongle cable at the device must always be plugged during oper-
ation!
For mounting the D-subminiature connector of the dongle cable please observe
the following:
• Plug the 9-pin connector of the dongle cable with the connecting parts into the
control panel or the cubicle door according to the following figure. For dimensions
of the panel flush or cubicle door cutout see Section 4.6.
• Plug the 68-pin connector of the cable into the corresponding connection at the rear
side of the device.
3 Mounting and Commissioning
106 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Figure 3-16 Plugging the subminiature connector of the dongle cable into the control panel
or cabinet door (example housing size 1/2)
3.2 Checking Connections
107
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
3.2 Checking Connections
3.2.1 Checking Data Connections of Serial Interfaces
Pin assignments The following tables illustrate the pin assignments of the various serial device interfac-
es and of the time synchronization interface. The position of the connections can be
seen in the following figure.
Figure 3-17 9-pin D-subminiature female connectors
Figure 3-18 Ethernet connection
Operator Interface When the recommended communication cable is used, correct connection between
the SIPROTEC®4 device and the PC is automatically ensured. See the Appendix for
an ordering description of the cable.
Service Interface Check the data connection if the service (port C) is used to communicate with the
device via fix wiring or a modem. If the service port is used as input for one or two RTD-
boxes, verify the interconnection according to one of the connection examples given
in the Appendix A.3.
System Interface For versions equipped with a serial interface to a control center, the user must check
the data connection. The visual check of the assignment of the transmission and re-
ception channels is of particular importance. With RS232 and fibre optic interfaces,
each connection is dedicated to one transmission direction. Therefore the output of
one device must be connected to the input of the other device and vice versa.
3 Mounting and Commissioning
108 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
With data cables, the connections are designated according to DIN 66020 and ISO
2110:
• TxD = Data Transmit
• RxD = Data Receive
•RTS
= Request to Send
•CTS
= Clear to Send
• GND = Signal/Chassis Ground
The cable shield is to be grounded at both ends. For extremely EMC environments,
the GND may be connected via a separate individually shielded wire pair to improve
immunity to interference. The following table list the assignments of the D-subminia-
ture connector for the various serial interfaces.
Table 3-13 Assignments of the connectors to the various interfaces
1) Pin 7 also carries the RTS signal with RS232 level when operated as RS485 interface. Pin 7
must therefore not be connected!
Termination The RS485 interfaces are capable of half-duplex service with the signals A/A’ and B/B’
with a common reference potential C/C’ (GND). Verify that only the last device on the
bus has the terminating resistors connected, and that the other devices on the bus do
not. The jumpers for the terminating resistors are on the interface module RS485
(Figure 3-9) or on the Profibus module RS485 (Figure 3-10). It is also possible that the
terminating resistors are arranged externally, e.g. on the connection module (Figure
3-11). In this case, the terminating resistors located on the module must be discon-
nected.
If the bus is extended, make sure again that only the last device on the bus has the
terminating resistors switched-in, and that all other devices on the bus do not.
Pin No. RS232 RS485 PROFIBUS FMS Slave,
RS485
Modbus RS485 Ethernet
EN 100
PROFIBUS DP Slave, RS485 DNP3.0 RS485
1 Shield (with shield ends electrically connected) Tx+
2 RxD – – – Tx–
3 TxD A/A’ (RxD/TxD-N) B/B’ (RxD/TxD-P) A Rx+
4 – – CNTR-A (TTL) RTS (TTL level) —
5 GND C/C' (GND) C/C' (GND) GND1 —
6 – – +5 V (max. load with 100 mA) VCC1 Rx–
7RTS – 1) ––—
8CTSB/B’ (RxD/TxD-P) A/A’ (RxD/TxD-N) B —
9 – – – – not available
3.2 Checking Connections
109
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Time Synchroniza-
tion Interface
It is optionally possible to process 5 V-, 12 V- or 24 V- time synchronization signals,
provided that they are carried to the inputs named in the following table.
Table 3-14 D-SUB socket assignment of the time synchronization interface
1) assigned, but not used
O p t i c a l F i b e r s
WARNING!
Laser injection!
Do not look directly into the fiber-optic elements!
Signals transmitted via optical fibers are unaffected by interference. The fibers guar-
antee electrical isolation between the connections. Transmit and receive connections
are represented by symbols.
The character idle state for the optical fiber interface is “Light off”. If the character idle
state is to be changed, use the operating program DIGSI, as described in the
SIPROTEC® 4 System Description.
RTD-box (Resis-
tance Temperature
Detector)
If one or two 7XV566 temperature meters are connected, check their connections to
the port (port C).
Verify also the termination: The terminating resistors must be connected to 6MD63
(see Section 3.2, "Termination").
For information on the 7XV566 refer to the instruction manual of 7XV566. Check the
transmission settings at the temperature meter. Besides the baudrate and the parity
observe also the bus number.
For connection of RTD-box(es) proceed as follows:
• For connection of 1 RTD-box 7XV566:
Bus number = 0 (to be set at 7XV566).
• For connection of 2 RTD-boxes 7XV566:
Bus number = 1 for the 1st RTD-box (to be set at 7XV566 for RTD 1 to 6), bus
number = 2 for the 2nd RTD-box (to be set at 7XV566 for RTD 7 to 12).
Pin No. Description Signal Meaning
1 P24_TSIG Input 24 V
2 P5_TSIG Input 5 V
3 M_TSIG Return Line
4–
1) – 1)
5 SHIELD Shield Potential
6– –
7 P12_TSIG Input 12 V
8 P_TSYNC 1) Input 24 V 1)
9 SHIELD Shield Potential
3 Mounting and Commissioning
110 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
3.2.2 Checking Power Plant Connections
Before the device is energized for the first time, it should be in the final operating en-
vironment for at least 2 hours to equalize the temperature, to avoid humidity and con-
densation. Connections are checked with the device at its final location. The plant
must first be switched off and grounded.
WARNING!
Warning of dangerous voltages
Non-observance of the following measures can result in death, personal injury or sub-
stantial property damage.
Therefore, only qualified people who are familiar with and adhere to the safety proce-
dures and precautionary measures should perform the inspection steps.
Caution!
Be careful when operating the device on a battery charger without a battery
Non-observance of the following measure can lead to unusually high voltages and
consequently, the destruction of the device.
Do not operate the device on a battery charger without a connected battery. (Limit
values can be found in the Technical Data).
Before the device is energized for the first time, the device should be in the final oper-
ating environment for at least 2 hours to equalize the temperature, to minimize humid-
ity and avoid condensation. Connections are checked with the device at its final loca-
tion. The plant must first be switched off and grounded.
Proceed as follows in order to check the system connections:
• Protective switches for the power supply and the measured voltages must be
opened.
• Check the continuity of all current and voltage transformer connections against the
system and connection diagrams:
– Are the current transformers grounded properly?
– Are the polarities of the current transformers the same?
– Is the phase relationship of the current transformers correct?
– Are the voltage transformers grounded properly?
– Are the polarities of the voltage transformers correct?
– Is the phase relationship of the voltage transformers correct?
– Is the polarity for current input IN correct (if used)?
– Is the polarity for voltage input VN correct (if used for broken delta winding)?
3.2 Checking Connections
111
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
• The short-circuit feature of the current circuits of the device are to be checked. This
may be performed with an ohmmeter or other test equipment for checking continu-
ity.
– Remove the front panel of the device (see also Figure 3-1 and 3-2).
– Remove the ribbon cable connected to the I/O board with the measured current
inputs (No. 2 in Figure 3-1 and 3-2). Furthermore, remove the printed circuit
board so that there is no more contact anymore with the plug-in terminal of the
housing.
– At the terminals of the device, check continuity for each pair of terminals that re-
ceives current from the CTs.
– Firmly re-insert the board again. Carefully connect the ribbon cable. Do not bend
any connector pins! Do not use force!
– At the terminals of the device, again check continuity for each pair of terminals
that receives current from the CTs.
– Attach the front panel and tighten the screws.
• Connect an ammeter in the supply circuit of the power supply. A range of about 2.5
A to 5 A for the meter is appropriate.
• Switch on m.c.b. for auxiliary voltage (supply protection), check the voltage level
and, if applicable, the polarity of the voltage at the device terminals or at the con-
nection modules.
• The current input should correspond to the power input in neutral position of the
device. The measured steady state current should be insignificant. Transient move-
ment of the ammeter merely indicates the charging current of capacitors.
• Remove the voltage from the power supply by opening the supply circuit of the
power supply.
• Disconnect the measuring test equipment; restore the normal power supply con-
nections.
• Remove the voltage from the power supply by closing the supply circuit of the power
supply.
• Close the protective switches for the voltage transformers.
• Verify that the voltage phase rotation at the device terminals is correct.
• Open the protective switches for the voltage transformers and the power supply.
• Check the trip and close circuits to the power system circuit breakers.
• Verify that the control wiring to and from other devices is correct.
• Check the signalling connections.
• Close the protective switches.
3 Mounting and Commissioning
112 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
3.3 Commissioning
WARNING!
Warning of dangerous voltages when operating an electrical device
Non-observance of the following measures can result in death, personal injury or sub-
stantial property damage.
Only qualified people shall work on and around this device. They must be thoroughly
familiar with all warnings and safety notices in this instruction manual as well as with
the applicable safety steps, safety regulations, and precautionary measures.
The device is to be grounded to the substation ground before any other connections
are made.
Hazardous voltages can exist in the power supply and at the connections to current
transformers, voltage transformers, and test circuits.
Hazardous voltages can be present in the device even after the power supply voltage
has been removed (capacitors can still be charged).
After removing voltage from the power supply, wait a minimum of 10 seconds before
re-energizing the power supply. This wait allows the initial conditions to be firmly es-
tablished before the device is re-energized.
The limit values given in Technical Data must not be exceeded, neither during testing
nor during commissioning.
When testing the device with secondary test equipment, make sure that no other mea-
surement quantities are connected and that the TRIP command lines and possibly the
CLOSE command lines to the circuit breakers are interrupted, unless otherwise spec-
ified.
DANGER!
Hazardous voltages during interruptions in secondary circuits of current trans-
formers
Non-observance of the following measure will result in death, severe personal injury
or substantial property damage.
Short-circuit the current transformer secondary circuits before current connections to
the device are opened.
For the commissioning switching operations have to be carried out. A prerequisite for
the prescribed tests is that these switching operations can be executed without
danger. They are accordingly not meant for operational checks.
3.3 Commissioning
113
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
WARNING!
Warning of dangers evolving from improper primary tests
Non-observance of the following measures can result in death, personal injury or sub-
stantial property damage.
Primary test may only be carried out by qualified personnel, who are familiar with the
commissioning of protection systems, the operation of the plant and the safety rules
and regulations (switching, earthing, etc.).
3.3.1 Test Mode and Transmission Block
If the device is connected to a central or main computer system via the SCADA inter-
face, then the information that is transmitted can be influenced. This is only possible
with some of the protocols available (see Table “Protocol-dependent functions” in the
Appendix A.6).
If Test mode is set ON, then a message sent by a SIPROTEC® device to the main
system has an additional test bit. This bit allows the message to be recognized as re-
sulting from testing and not an actual fault or power system event. Furthermore it can
be determined by activating the Transmission block that no annunciation at all are
transmitted via the system interface during test mode.
The SIPROTEC® System Description /1/ describes how to activate and deactivate test
mode and blocked data transmission. Note that when DIGSI® is being used, the
program must be in the Online operating mode for the test features to be used.
3.3.2 Testing System Ports
Prefacing Remarks If the device features a system interface and uses it to communicate with the control
center, the DIGSI device operation can be used to test if messages are transmitted
correctly. This test option should however definitely not be used while the device is in
service on a live system.
DANGER!
Danger evolving from operating the equipment (e.g. circuit breakers, discon-
nectors) by means of the test function
Non-observance of the following measure will result in death, severe personal injury
or substantial property damage.
Equipment used to allow switching such as circuit breakers or disconnectors is to be
checked only during commissioning. Do not under any circumstances check them by
means of the testing mode during “real” operation performing transmission and recep-
tion of messages via the system interface.
3 Mounting and Commissioning
114 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Note
After termination of the test mode, the device will reboot. Thereby, all annunciation
buffers are erased. If required, these buffers should be extracted with DIGSI® prior to
the test.
The interface test is carried out Online using DIGSI®:
• Open the Online directory by double-clicking; the operating functions for the device
appear.
• Click on Test; the function selection appears in the right half of the screen.
• Double-click in the list view on Generate Indications. The dialog box Generate In-
dications opens (see the following figure).
Structure of the
Test Dialog Box
In the column Indication the display texts of all annunciations are displayed which
were allocated to the system interface in the matrix. In the column Status Scheduled
the user has to define the value for the messages to be tested. Depending on annun-
ciation type, several input fields are offered (e.g. “annunciation coming” / “an-
nunciation going”). By clicking on one of the fields you can select the desired
value from the pull-down menu.
Figure 3-19 System interface test with dialog box: Generate annunciations — example
Changing the
Operating State
By clicking one of the buttons in the column Action you will be asked for the password
no. 6 (for hardware test menus). After correct entry of the password, individual annun-
ciations can be initiated. To do so, click on the button Send on the corresponding line.
The corresponding annunciation is issued and can be read out either from the event
log of the SIPROTEC®4 device or from the substation control system.
As long as the window is open, further tests can be performed.
3.3 Commissioning
115
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Test in Message
Direction
For all information that is transmitted to the central station test in Status Scheduled
the desired options in the list which appears:
• Make sure that each checking process is carried out carefully without causing any
danger (see above and refer to DANGER!)
• Click on Send in the function to be tested and check whether the transmitted infor-
mation reaches the central station and shows the desired reaction. Data which are
normally linked via binary inputs (first character “>”) are likewise indicated to the
central power system with this procedure. The function of the binary inputs itself is
tested separately.
Exiting the Test
Mode
To end the System Interface Test, click on Close. The device is briefly out of service
while the start-up routine is executed. The dialogue box closes.
Test in Command
Direction
The information transmitted in command direction must be indicated by the central
station. Check whether the reaction is correct.
3.3.3 Checking the Status of Binary Inputs and Outputs
Prefacing Remarks The binary inputs, outputs, and LEDs of a SIPROTEC® 4 device can be individually
and precisely controlled in DIGSI®. This feature is used, for example, to verify control
wiring from the device to plant equipment (operational checks), during commissioning.
This test option should however definitely “not” be used while the device is in service
on a live system.
DANGER!
Danger evolving from operating the equipment (e.g. circuit breakers, discon-
nectors) by means of the test function
Non-observance of the following measure will result in death, severe personal injury
or substantial property damage.
Equipment used to allow switching such as circuit breakers or disconnectors is to be
checked only during commissioning. Do not under any circumstances check them by
means of the testing mode during “real” operation performing transmission and recep-
tion of messages via the system interface.
Note
After termination of the hardware test, the device will reboot. Thereby, all annunciation
buffers are erased. If required, these buffers should be extracted with DIGSI® prior to
the test.
3 Mounting and Commissioning
116 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
The hardware test can be done using DIGSI® in the online operating mode:
• Open the Online directory by double-clicking; the operating functions for the device
appear.
• Click on Test; the function selection appears in the right half of the screen.
• Double-click in the list view on Hardware Test. The dialog box of the same name
opens (see the following figure).
Structure of the
Test Dialogue Box
The dialog box is classified into three groups: BI for binary inputs, BO for output relays
and LED for light-emitting diodes. On the left of each of these groups is an accordingly
labelled button. By double-clicking a button, information regarding the associated
group can be shown or hidden.
In the column Actual the present (physical) state of the hardware component is dis-
played. Indication is made by symbols. The physical scheduled states of the binary
inputs and outputs are indicated by an open or closed switch symbol, the LEDs by a
dark or illuminated LED symbol.
The opposite state of each element is displayed in the column Scheduled. The display
is made in plain text.
The right-most column indicates the commands or messages that are configured
(masked) to the hardware components.
Figure 3-20 Test of the Binary Inputs and Outputs — Example
Changing the
Operating State
To change the operating state of a hardware component, click on the associated
button in the Scheduled column.
Password No. 6 (if activated during configuration) will be requested before the first
hardware modification is allowed. After entry of the correct password a condition
change will be executed. Further condition changes remain possible while the dialog
box is open.
3.3 Commissioning
117
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Test of the Binary
Outputs
Each individual output relay can be energized allowing a check of the wiring between
the output relay of the 6MD63 and the system, without having to generate the
message that is assigned to the relay. As soon as the first change of state for any of
the output relays is initiated, all output relays are separated from the internal device
functions, and can only be operated by the hardware test function. This means, that
e.g. a TRIP command coming from a control command from the operator panel to an
output relay cannot be executed.
Proceed as follows in order to check the output relay :
• Ensure that the switching of the output relay can be executed without danger (see
above under DANGER!).
• Each output relay must be tested via the corresponding Scheduled-cell in the
dialog box.
• Finish the testing (see margin title below “Exiting the Procedure”), so that during
further testings no unwanted switchings are initiated.
Test of the Binary
Inputs
To test the wiring between the plant and the binary inputs of the 6MD63 the condition
in the system which initiates the binary input must be generated and the response of
the device checked.
To do so, the dialog box Hardware Test must be opened again to view the physical
state of the binary inputs. The password is not yet required.
Proceed as follows in order to check the binary inputs:
• Each state in the plant which causes a binary input to pick up must be generated.
• The response of the device must be checked in the Actual column of the dialog
box. To do this, the dialog box must be updated. The options may be found below
under the margin heading “Updating the Display”.
• Finish the testing (see margin heading below “Exiting the Procedure”).
If, however, the effect of a binary input must be checked without carrying out any
switching in the plant, it is possible to trigger individual binary inputs with the hardware
test function. As soon as the first state change of any binary input is triggered and the
password no. 6 has been entered, all binary inputs are separated from the plant and
can only be activated via the hardware test function.
Test of the LEDs The LEDs may be tested in a similar manner to the other input/output components. As
soon as the first state change of any LED has been triggered, all LEDs are separated
from the internal device functionality and can only be controlled via the hardware test
function. This implies that no LED can be switched on anymore by e.g. a device func-
tion or operation of the LED reset key.
Updating the
Display
During the opening of the dialog box Hardware Test the operating states of the hard-
ware components which are current at this time are read in and displayed.
An update occurs:
• for each hardware component, if a command to change the condition is successfully
performed,
• for all hardware components if the Update button is clicked,
• for all hardware components with cyclical updating (cycle time is 20 seconds) if the
Automatic Update (20sec) field is marked.
3 Mounting and Commissioning
118 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Exiting the Test
Mode
To end the hardware test, click on Close. The dialog box closes. The device becomes
unavailable for a brief start-up period immediately after this. Then all hardware com-
ponents are returned to the operating conditions determined by the plant settings.
3.3.4 Testing User-Defined Functions
CFC Logic The device has a vast capability for allowing functions to be defined by the user, es-
pecially with the CFC logic. Any special function or logic added to the device must be
checked.
Naturally, general test procedures cannot be given. Rather, the configuration of these
user-defined functions and the necessary associated conditions must be known and
verified. Possible interlocking conditions of switching devices (circuit breakers, discon-
nectors, ground switch) are of particular importance. They must be considered and
tested.
3.3.5 Current, Voltage, and Phase Rotation Testing
≥ 10 % of Load
Current
The connections of the current and voltage transformers are tested using primary
quantities. Secondary load current of at least 10 % of the nominal current of the device
is necessary. The line is energized and will remain in this state during the measure-
ments.
With proper connections of the measuring circuits, none of the measured-values su-
pervision elements in the device should pick up. If an element detects a problem, the
causes which provoked it may be viewed in the Event Log.
If current or voltage summation errors occur, check the matching factors.
Messages from the symmetry monitoring could occur because there actually are
asymmetrical conditions in the network. If these asymmetrical conditions are normal
service conditions, the corresponding monitoring functions should be made less sen-
sitive.
Values Currents and voltages can be seen in the display field at the front of the device or the
operator interface via a PC. They can be compared to the quantities measured by an
independent source, as primary and secondary quantities.
If the measured values are not plausible, the connection must be checked and correct-
ed after the line has been isolated and the current transformer circuits have been
short-circuited. The measurements must then be repeated.
P h a s e R o t a t i o n The phase rotation must correspond to the configured phase rotation, in general a
clockwise phase rotation. If the system has an anti-clockwise phase rotation, this must
have been considered when the power system data was set (address 209 PHASE
SEQ.). If the phase rotation is incorrect, the alarm “Fail Ph. Seq.” (171) is gen-
erated. The measured value phase allocation must be checked and corrected, if re-
quired, after the line has been isolated and current transformers have been short-cir-
cuited. The measurement must then be repeated.
3.3 Commissioning
119
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Voltage Transform-
er-Protective
Switch
The VT mcb of the feeder (if used) must be opened. The measured voltages in the op-
erational measured values appear with a value close to zero (small measured voltag-
es are of no consequence).
Check in the spontaneous messages that the VT mcb trip was entered (message
“>FAIL:FEEDER VT” “ON” in the spontaneous messages). Beforehand it has to be
assured that the position of the VT mcb is connected to the device via a binary input.
Close the VT mcb again: The above annunciations appear under the spontaneous an-
nunciations as “OFF”, i.e. “>FAIL:FEEDER VT” “OFF”.
If one of the events does not appear, the connection and routing of these signals must
be checked.
If the “ON” state and the “OFF” state are swapped, the contact type (H-active or L-
active) must be checked and remedied.
Switch off the protected power line.
3.3.6 Direction Test with Load Current
≥ 10 % of Load
Current
The correct connection of the current and voltage transformers are tested via the pro-
tected line using the load current. For this purpose, connect the line. The load current
the line carries must be at least 0.1 · INom. The load current should be in-phase or
lagging the voltage (resistive or resistive-inductive load). The direction of the load
current must be known. If there is a doubt, network or ring loops should be opened.
The line remains energized during the test.
The direction can be derived directly from the operational measured values. Initially
the correlation of the measured load direction with the actual direction of load flow is
checked. In this case the normal situation is assumed whereby the forward direction
(measuring direction) extends from the busbar towards the line (see the following fig-
ure).
P positive, if active power flows into the line,
P negative, if active power flows towards the busbar,
Q positive, if reactive power flows into the line,
Q negative, if reactive power flows toward the busbar.
Figure 3-21 Apparent Load Power
3 Mounting and Commissioning
120 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
If power values are negative, the assignment of the direction between current trans-
former and voltage transformer set does not correspond with the direction configured
in address 201 CT Starpoint. If applicable, change the configuration of the param-
eter 201. If the power continues being incorrect, there must be an error in the trans-
former wiring (e.g. cyclical phase swap) which has to be rectified.
3.3.7 Checking the Temperature Measurement via RTD-Box
After the termination of the RS485 interface and the setting of the bus address in the
device have been verified according to Section 3.2, the measured temperature values
and thresholds can be checked.
If temperature sensors are used with 2-phase connection you must first determine the
line resistance for the temperature detector being short-circuited. Select mode 6 at the
RTD-Box and enter the resistance value you have determined for the corresponding
sensor (range: 0 to 50.6 Ω).
When using the preset 3-phase connection for the temperature detectors no further
entry must be made.
For checking the measured temperature values the temperature detectors are re-
placed by settable resistances (e.g. precision resistance decade) and the correct as-
signment of the resistance value and the displayed temperature for 2 or 3 temperature
values from the following table are verified.
Table 3-15 Assignment of the resistance value and the temperature of the sensors
Temperature in
°F
Temperature in
°C
Ni 100 DIN
43760
Ni 120 DIN
34760
Pt 100 IEC 751
–50 –58 74.255 89.106 80.3062819
–40 –40 79.1311726 94.9574071 84.270652
–30 –22 84.1457706 100.974925 88.2216568
–20 –4 89.2964487 107.155738 92.1598984
–10 14 94.581528 113.497834 96.085879
0 32 100 120 100
10 50 105.551528 126.661834 103.902525
20 68 111.236449 133.483738 107.7935
30 86 117.055771 140.466925 111.672925
40 104 123.011173 147.613407 115.5408
50 122 129.105 154.926 119.397125
60 140 135.40259 162.408311 123.2419
70 158 141.720613 170.064735 127.075125
80 176 148.250369 177.900442 130.8968
90 194 154.934473 185.921368 134.706925
100 212 161.7785 194.1342 138.5055
110 230 168.788637 202.546364 142.292525
120 248 175.971673 211.166007 146.068
130 266 183.334982 220.001979 149.831925
140 284 190.88651 229.063812 153.5843
150 302 198.63475 238.3617 157.325125
160 320 206.58873 247.906476 161.0544
170 338 214.757989 257.709587 164.772125
3.3 Commissioning
121
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Temperature thresholds that are configured in the device can be checked by slowly
approaching the resistance value.
3.3.8 Trip/Close Tests for the Configured Operating Devices
Control by Local
Command
If the configured operating devices were not switched sufficiently in the hardware test
already described, all configured switching devices must be switched on and off from
the device via the integrated control element. The feedback information of the circuit
breaker position injected via binary inputs is read out at the device and compared with
the actual breaker position. With 6MD63 this is easy to do with the control display.
The switching procedure is described in the SIPROTEC ® System Description /1/. The
switching authority must be set in correspondence with the source of commands used.
The switching mode can be selected from interlocked and non-interlocked switching.
Please take note that non-interlocked switching can be a safety hazard.
DANGER!
A test cycle successfully started by the automatic reclosure function can lead
to the closing of the circuit breaker!
Non-observance of the following statement will result in death, severe personal injury
or substantial property damage.
Be fully aware that OPEN-commands sent to the circuit breaker can result in a trip-
close-trip event of the circuit breaker by an external reclosing device.
Control from a
Remote Control
Center
If the device is connected to a remote substation via a system interface, the corre-
sponding switching tests may also be checked from the substation. Please also take
into consideration that the switching authority is set in correspondence with the source
of commands used.
180 356 223.152552 267.783063 168.4783
190 374 231.782912 278.139495 172.172925
200 392 240.66 288.792 175.856
210 410 249.79516 299.754192 179.527525
220 428 259.200121 311.040145 183.1875
230 446 268.886968 322.664362 186.835925
240 464 278.868111 334.641733 190.4728
250 482 289.15625 346.9875 194.098125
Temperature in
°F
Temperature in
°C
Ni 100 DIN
43760
Ni 120 DIN
34760
Pt 100 IEC 751
3 Mounting and Commissioning
122 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
3.4 Final Preparation of the Device
Firmly tighten all screws. Tighten all terminal screws, including those that are not used.
Caution!
Inadmissable tightening torques
Non–observance of the following measure can result in minor personal injury or
property damage.
The tightening torques must not be exceeded as the threads and terminal chambers
may otherwise be damaged!
The settings should be checked again, if they were changed during the tests.
Check if all power system data, control and auxiliary functions to be found with the
configuration parameters are set correctly (Section 2). All desired functions must be
set to ON. Keep a copy of all of the in-service settings on a PC.
Check the internal clock of the device. If necessary, set the clock or synchronize the
clock if the element is not automatically synchronized. For assistance, refer to the
SIPROTEC® System Description /1/
The annunciation buffers are deleted under MAIN MENU → Annunciations →
Set/Reset, so that future information will only apply for actual events and states (see
also /1/). The counters in the switching statistics should be reset to the values that
were existing prior to the testing (see also SIPROTEC® System Description /1/).
The counters of the operational measured values (e.g. operation counter, if available)
are reset under Main Menu → Measurement → Reset.
Press the ESC key (several times if necessary), to return to the default display. The
default display appears in the display box (e.g. the display of operational measured
values).
Clear the LEDs on the front panel by pressing the LED key, so that they only show real
events and states. In this context, also output relays probably memorized are reset.
Pressing the LED key also serves as a test for the LEDs on the front panel because
they should all light when the button is pushed. Any LEDs that are lit after the clearing
attempt are displaying actual conditions.
The green “RUN” LED must be on. The red “ERROR” LED must be off.
If test switches are available, then these must be in the operating position.
The device is now ready for operation.
■
1236MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Technical Data 4
This chapter provides the technical data of the SIPROTEC® 6MD63 device and its in-
dividual functions, including the limit values that under no circumstances may be ex-
ceeded. The electrical and functional data for the maximum functional scope are fol-
lowed by the mechanical data with dimensional drawings.
4.1 General Device Data 124
4.2 Breaker Control 136
4.3 RTD Boxes for Overload Detection 137
4.4 User-Defined Functions (CFC) 138
4.5 Additional Functions 142
4.6 Dimensions 147
4 Technical Data
124 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
4.1 General Device Data
4.1.1 Analog Inputs
Current Inputs
Voltage Inputs
Measuring Transducer Inputs
Nominal Frequency fNom 50 Hz or 60 Hz (adjustable)
Nominal Current INom 1 A or 5 A
Burden per Phase and Ground Path
- at INom = 1 A Approx. 0.05 VA
- at INom = 5 A Approx. 0.3 VA
AC Current Overload Capability
- Thermal (rms) 100 · INom for 1 s
30 · INom for 10 s
4 · INom continuous
- Dynamic (peak value) 250 · INom (half-cycle)
Secondary Nominal Voltage 100 V to 225 V
Measuring Range 0 V to 170 V
Burden at 100 V Approx. 0.3 VA
AC Voltage Input Overload Capacity
- thermal (rms) 230 V continuous
Input Current 0 mA DC to 20 mA DC
Input Resistance 10 Ω
Power Consumption 5.8 mW at 24 mA
4.1 General Device Data
125
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
4.1.2 Power Supply Voltage
Direct Voltage
Alternating Voltage
Voltage Supply via Integrated Converter
Rated auxiliary DC VAux 24/48 VDC 60/110/125 VDC
Permissible Voltage Ranges 19 to 58 VDC 48 to 150 VDC
Rated auxiliary DC VAux 110/125/220/250 V DC
Permissible Voltage Ranges 88 to 300 VDC
Permissible AC ripple voltage, peak to
peak,
IEC 60255-11
≤ 15 % of the auxiliary voltage
Power Consumption Quiescent Energized
6MD631 Approx. 4 W Approx. 10 W
6MD632,
6MD633,
6MD634
Approx. 5.5 W Approx. 16 W
6MD635,
6MD636,
6MD637
Approx. 7 W Approx. 20 W
Bridging Time for Failure/Short Circuit,
IEC 60255-11
≥ 50 ms with V ≥ 110 VDC
≥ 20 ms with V ≥ 24 VDC
Voltage Supply via Integrated Converter
Nominal auxiliary voltage AC VAux 115 VAC 230 VAC
Permissible Voltage Ranges 92 to 132 VAC 184 to 265 VAC
Power Consumption
Quiescent Approx. 6 VA Approx. 6 VA
Energized, Maximum Approx. 20 VA Approx. 20 VA
Bridging Time for Failure/Short Circuit ≥ 200 ms
4 Technical Data
126 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
4.1.3 Binary Inputs and Outputs
Binary Inputs
Output Relay
Variant Number
6MD631*- 11 (configurable)
6MD632*- 24 (configurable)
6MD633*- 20 (configurable)
6MD634*- 20 (configurable)
6MD635*- 37 (configurable)
6MD636*- 33 (configurable)
6MD637*- 33 (configurable)
Rated Voltage Range 24 VDC to 250 VDC, bipolar
Binary input BI1....6; BI8....19;
BI25....36
BI7; BI20....24; BI37
Current Consumption (independent of
the control voltage)
Approx. 0.9 mA Approx. 1.8 mA
Pickup Times Approx. 9 ms Approx. 4 ms
Switching Thresholds Switching Thresholds, adjustable voltage range with
jumpers
For Nominal Voltages 24/48 VDC and
60/110/125 VDC
V high ≥ 19 VDC
V low ≤ 10 VDC
For Nominal Voltages 110/125/220/250 VDC and
115/230 VAC
V high ≥ 88 VDC
V low ≤ 60 VDC
For Nominal Voltages
(only for modules with 3 switching
thresholds)
220/250 VDC V high ≥ 176 VDC
V low ≤ 132 VDC
Maximum Permissible Voltage 300 VDC
Impulse Filter on Input 220 nF at 220 V with recovery time > 60 ms
Output Relay for Commands/Annunciations, Alarm Relay1)
High-duty relay2)
Number and Information According to the order variant (allocatable)
Order Variant NO contact1)NO/NC
selectable1)
High-duty relay2)
6MD631*- 8 1 –
6MD632*- 11 1 4
6MD633*- 11 1 4
6MD634*- 6 1 4
6MD635*- 14 1 8
6MD636*- 14 1 8
6MD637*- 9 1 8
Switching Capability MAKE 1000 W/VA 1)–
Switching Capability BREAK 30 VA
40 W resistive
25 W at L/R ≤ 50 ms
–
–
–
4.1 General Device Data
127
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
4.1.4 Communication Interfaces
Operator Interface
Switching Voltage 250 VDC 250 VDC
Permissible Current per Contact ( con-
tinuous)
5A —
Permissible Current per Contact (close
and hold)
30 A for 0.5 S (NO contact)
Permissible Current per Contact
on Common Path
5 A continuous
30 A for 0.5 S (NO contact)
—
—
Max. Switching Capability for 30 s
At 28 V to 250 V
at 24 V
—
—
1000 W 2)
500 W
Permissible Relative Closing Time – 1– %
Operating Time, Approx. 8 ms 8 ms —
1) UL-listed with the following nominal values:
120 VAC Pilot duty, B300
240 VAC Pilot duty, B
240 VAC 5 A General Purpose
24 VDC 5 A General Purpose
48 VDC 0.8 A General Purpose
240 VDC 0.1 A General Purpose
120 VAC 1/6 hp (4.4 FLA)
240 VAC 1/2 hp (4.9 FLA)
2) UL-listed with the following nominal values:
240 VDC 1.6 FLA
120 VDC 3.2 FLA
60 VDC 5.5 FLA
Connection front side, non-isolated, RS232, 9 pin DSUB socket for
connecting a personal computer
Operation With DIGSI®
Transmission Speed Min. 4.800 Baud; max. 115, 200 Baud;
Factory Setting: 38 400 Baud; Parity: HE'D
Maximum Distance of Transmission 49.2 feet (15 m)
4 Technical Data
128 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Service-/Modem Interface
RS232/RS 485/FO according
to the ordering variant
Isolated interface for data
transfer
for operation using the DIGSI®
or
for connection to a RTD-box
RS232
Connection for panel flush
mounting housing
Rear panel, slot “C”, 9-pole D-
SUB miniature connector
shielded data cable
Connection for Panel Surface-
Mounted Housing
In the housing at the case
bottom;
shielded data cable
Test Voltage 500 V; 50 Hz
Transmission Speed min. 4 800 Baud; max.
115 200 Baud;
Factory setting 38,400 Baud
Maximum Distance of Trans-
mission
49.2 feet (15 m)
RS485
Connection for panel flush
mounting housing
Rear panel, mounting location
“C”,
9-pole -DSUB miniature con-
nector
shielded data cable
Connection for Panel Surface-
Mounted Housing
In the housing at the case
bottom;
shielded data cable
Test Voltage 500 V; 50 Hz
Transmission Speed min. 4,800 Baud; max. 115,200
Baud;
Factory setting 38,400 Baud
Maximum Distance of Trans-
mission
3.280 feet (1000 m)
Fibre Optical Link (FO)
Fibre Optical Link (FO) ST-Connector
Connection for panel flush
mounting housing
Rear panel, mounting location
“C”
Connection for panel surface-
mounted housing
In the housing on the case
bottom
Optical wavelength λ = 820 nm
Laser Class 1 according to
EN 60825-1/-2
using glass fiber 50/125 µm or
using glass fiber 62.5/125 µm
Permissible optical link signal
attenuation
max. 8 dB, with glass fiber
62.5/125 µm
Maximum distance of transmis-
sion
max. 0.93 miles (1.5 km)
Character idle state Configurable; factory setting
“Light off”
4.1 General Device Data
129
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
System Interface
IEC 60870-5-103
RS 232/RS 485/FO ac-
cording to the ordering
variant
Isolated interface for data transfer to a
master terminal
RS232
Connection for flush-
mounted housing
Rear panel, mounting location “B” 9-
pole D-SUB miniature connector
Connection for panel
surface mounting housing
At the housing mounted case on the
case bottom
Test Voltage 500 V; 50 Hz
Transmission Speed Min. 4 800 Baud; max. 38 400 Baud;
Factory setting 9 600 Baud
Maximum Distance of
Transmission
49.2 feet (15 m)
RS485
Connection for flush-
mounted housing
Rear panel, mounting location “B” 9-
pole D-SUB miniature connector
Connection for panel
surface mounting housing
At the housing mounted case on the
case bottom
Test Voltage 500 V; 50 Hz
Transmission Speed Min. 4 800 Baud; max. 38 400 Baud;
Factory setting 9 600 Baud
Maximum Distance of
Transmission
Max. 0.62 miles (1 km)
Fibre Optical Link (FO)
FO connector type ST connector
Connection for flush-
mounting housing
Rear panel, mounting location “B”
Connection for panel
surface mounting housing
At the housing mounted case on the
case bottom
Optical Wavelength λ = 820 nm
Laser Class 1 according to
EN 60825-1/-2
Using glass fiber 50/12 µm or using
glass fiber 62.5/125 µm
Permissible Optical Link
Signal Attenuation
Max. 8 dB, with glass fiber 62.5/125
µm
Maximum Distance of
Transmission
Max. 0.93 miles (1,5 km)
Character Idle State Configurable: factory setting “Light off”
PROFIBUS RS485 (FMS
and DP) Connection for flush-
mounting housing
Rear panel, mounting location “B” 9-
pole D-SUB miniature connector
Connection for panel
surface mounting housing
At the housing mounted case on the
case bottom
Test Voltage 500 V; 50 Hz
Transmission Speed Up to 1.5 MBd
Maximum Distance of
Transmission
1.000 m / 3280 feet at ≤ 93.75 kBd
500 m / 1640 feet at ≤ 187.5 kBd
200 m / 656 feet with≤ 1.5 MBd
4 Technical Data
130 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
PROFIBUS FO (FMS and
DP) FO connector type ST-Connector
single ring / double ring according to
the order for FMS; for DP only double
ring available
Connection for flush-
mounting housing
Rear panel, mounting location “B”
Connection for panel
surface mounting housing
At the housing mounted case on the
case bottom
Transmission Speed Up to 1.5 MBd
Recommended: > 500 kBd with normal casing
≤ 57 600 Bd at Detached Operator
Panel
Optical Wavelength λ = 820 nm
Laser class I acc. to
EN 60825-1/-2
Using glass fiber 50/125 µm or using
glass fiber 62.5/125 µm
Permissible Optical Link
Signal Attenuation
Max. 8 dB, with glass fiber 62.5/125
µm
Maximum Distance of
Transmission
Max. 0.62 miles (1.5 km)
DNP3.0 / MODBUS
RS485 Connection for flush-
mounting housing
Rear panel, mounting location “B” 9-
pole D-SUB miniature connector
Connection for panel
surface mounting housing
At the housing mounted case on the
case bottom
Test Voltage 500 V; 50 Hz
Transmission Speed Up to 19,200 Bd
Maximum Distance of
Transmission
Max. 0.62 miles (1 km)
DNP3.0 / MODBUS Fibre
Optical Link FO connector type ST–Connector Receiver/Transmitter
Connection for flush-
mounting housing
Rear panel, mounting location “B”
Connection for surface-
mounting case
At the housing mounted case on the
case bottom
Transmission Speed Up to 19.200 Bd
Optical Wavelength λ = 820 nm
Laser class I acc. to
EN 60825-1/-2
Using glass fiber 50/125 µm or using
glass fiber 62.5/125 µm
Permissible Optical Link
Signal Attenuation
Max. 8 dB, with glass fiber 62.5/125
µm
Maximum Distance of
Transmission
Max. 0.93 miles (1.5 km)
Ethernet electrical (EN
100) for IEC61850, DIGSI
and inter-relay communi-
cation via GOOSE
Connection for flush-
mounted case
rear side, mounting location “B”
2 x RJ45 socket contact
100BaseT acc. to IEEE802.3
Connection for panel
surface-mounted housing
not available
Test voltage (reg. socket) 500 V; 50 Hz
Transmission speed 100 MBit/s
Bridgeable distance 65.62 feet (20 m)
4.1 General Device Data
131
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Time Synchronization Interface
4.1.5 Electrical Tests
Specifications
Insulation Test
Time synchronization DCF 77/IRIG B-Signal
(Telegram Format IRIG-B000)
Connection for flush- mounted
case
Rear panel, mounting location “A”
9-pole D-SUB miniature female connector
for surface mounting housing at the double-deck terminal on the case bottom
Signal nominal voltages selectable 5 V, 12 V or 24 V
Signal levels and Burdens for DCF 77 and IRIG B (format IRIG-B000)
Nominal signal voltage
5V 12V 24V
VIHigh 6.0 V 15.8 V 31 V
VILow 1.0 V at IILow = 0.25 mA 1.4 V at IILow = 0.25 mA 1.9 V at IILow = 0.25 mA
IIHigh 4.5 mA to 9.4 mA 4.5 mA to 9.3 mA 4.5 mA to 8.7 mA
RI890 Ω at VI = 4 V 1930 Ω at VI = 8.7 V 3780 Ω at VI = 17 V
640 Ω at VI = 6 V 1700 Ω at VI = 15.8 V 3560 Ω at VI = 31 V
Standards: IEC 60255 (product standards)
ANSI/IEEE Std C37.90.0/.1/.2
UL 508
DIN 57435 Part 303
See also standards for individual tests
Standards: IEC 60255-5 and IEC 60870-2-1
High Voltage Test (routine test) All circuits
except power supply, Binary Inputs, Commu-
nication Interface and Time Synchronization
Interfaces
2.5 kV (rms), 50 Hz
High Voltage Test (routine test) Auxiliary
Voltage and Binary Inputs
3.5 kV DC
High Voltage Test (routine test) Only Isolated
Communication and Time Synchronization In-
terfaces
500 V (rms), 50 Hz
Impulse Voltage Test (type test) All Circuits
Except Communication and Time Synchroni-
zation Interfaces, Class III
5 kV (peak value); 1.2/50 µs; 0.5 J;
3 positive and 3 negative impulses at intervals
of 1 s
4 Technical Data
132 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
EMC Tests for Immunity (Type Tests)
EMC Tests for Noise Emission (Type Test)
Standards: IEC 60255-6 and -22 (product standards)
EN 50082-2 (generic standard)
DIN 57435 Part 303
High frequency test
IEC 60255-22-1, Class III and
VDE 0435 part 303, class III
2.5 kV (peak); 1 MHz; τ = 15 µs;
400 surges per s; test duration 2 s; Ri = 200 Ω
Electrostatic discharge
IEC 60255-22-2, Class IV and
IEC 61000-4-2, Class IV
8 kV contact discharge; 15 kV air discharge,
both polarities; 150 pF; Ri = 330 Ω
Exposure to HF field, non-modulated
IEC 60255-22-3 (report), Class III
10 V/m; 27 MHz to 500 MHz
Irradiation with HF field, amplitude modulated
IEC 61000-4-3, Class III
10 V/m; 80 MHz to 1000 MHz; 80 % AM;
1kHz
Irradiation with HF field, pulse modulated
IEC 61000-4-3/ENV 50 204, Class III
10 V/m; 900 MHz; repetition frequency 200
Hz; duty cycle of 50 %
Fast Transient Disturbance Variables / Burst
IEC 60255-22-4 and IEC 61000-4-4, Class IV
4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz; burst length = 15 ms;
repetition rate 300 ms; both polarities: R i =
50 Ω; test duration 1 min
High energy surge voltages (SURGE),
IEC 61000-4-5 Installation Class 3
Auxiliary voltage
Measuring inputs, binary inputs, relay outputs
Impulse: 1.2/50 µs
Common mode: 2 kV; 12 Ω; 9 µF
Diff. mode:1 kV; 2 Ω; 18 µF
Common mode: 2 kV; 42Ω; 0. 5 µF
diff. mode: 1 kV; 42Ω; 0. 5 µF
HF on lines, amplitude-modulated
IEC 61000-4-6, Class III
10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz; 80 % AM; 1 kHz
Power System Frequency Magnetic Field
IEC 61000-4-8, Class IV
IEC 60255-6
30 A/m continuous; 300 A/m for 3 s; 50 Hz
0.5 mT; 50 Hz
Oscillatory Surge Withstand Capability
ANSI/IEEE Std C37.90.1
2.5 to 3 kV (peak value); 1 to 1.5 MHz;
damped oscillation; 50 surges per s; test du-
ration 2 s; Ri = 150 Ω to 200 Ω
Fast Transient Surge Withstand Cap.
ANSI/IEEE Std C37.90.1
4 kV to 5 kV: 10/150 ns: 50 pulses per s; both
polarities: test duration 2 s: Ri = 80 Ω
Radiated Electromagnetic Interference
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2
35 V/m; 25 MHz to 1000 MHz
Damped Oscillations
IEC 60694, IEC 61000-4-12
2.5 kV (peak value), polarity alternating
100 kHz, 1 MHz, 10 MHz and 50 MHz, Ri =
200 Ω
Standard: EN 50081-* (generic standard)
Radio Noise Voltage to Lines, Only Power
Supply Voltage
IEC-CISPR 22
150 kHz to 30 MHz
Limit Class B
Interference field strength
IEC-CISPR 22
30 MHz to 1000 MHz Limit Class B
4.1 General Device Data
133
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
4.1.6 Mechanical Stress Tests
Vibration and Shock Stress During Stationary Operation
Vibration and Shock Stress During Transport
Harmonic Currents on the Network Lead at
230 VAC
IEC 61000-3-2
Device is to be assigned Class D; (applies only
for devices with > 50 VA power consumption)
Voltage fluctuations and flicker on the
network incoming feeder at 230 VAC
IEC 61000-3-3
Limits are observed
Standards: IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068
Oscillation
IEC 60255-21-1, Class 2;
IEC 60068-2-6
Sinusoidal
10 Hz to 60 Hz: ± 0.075 mm amplitude;
60 Hz to 150 Hz: 1 g acceleration
Frequency sweep rate 1 Octave/min 20
cycles in 3 orthogonal axes.
Shock
IEC 60255-21-2, Class 1;
IEC 60068-2-27
Semi-sinusoidal
5 g acceleration, duration 11 ms, each 3
shocks in both directions of the 3 axes
Seismic Vibration
IEC 60255-21-3, Class 1;
IEC 60068-3-3
Sinusoidal
1 Hz to 8 Hz: ±3.5 mm amplitude (horizontal
axis)
1 Hz to 8 Hz: ±1.5 mm amplitude (vertical
axis)
8 Hz to 35 Hz: 1 g acceleration (horizontal
axis)
8 Hz to 35 Hz: 0.5 g acceleration (vertical
axis)
Frequency sweep 1 octave/min
1 cycle in 3 orthogonal axes
Standards: IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068
Oscillation
IEC 60255-21-1, Class 2;
IEC 60068-2-6
Sinusoidal
5 Hz to 8 Hz: ± 7.5 mm amplitude; 8 Hz to
15 Hz: 2 g acceleration
Frequency sweep 1 octave/min
20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes
Shock
IEC 60255-21-2, Class 1;
IEC 60068-2-27
Semi-sinusoidal
15 g acceleration, duration 11 ms,
each 3 shocks (in both directions of the 3
axes)
Continuous Shock
IEC 60255-21-2, Class 1;
IEC 60068-2-29
Semi-sinusoidal
10 g acceleration, duration 16 ms,
each 1000 shocks (in both directions of the 3
axes)
Note: All stress test data apply for devices in factory packaging.
4 Technical Data
134 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
4.1.7 Climatic Stress Tests
Temperatures1)
Humidity
4.1.8 Service Conditions
Standards: IEC 60255-6
Type tested (acc. IEC 60086-2-1 and -2, Test
Bd, for 16 h)
–13 °F to +185 °F or –25 °C to +85 °C
Permissible temporary operating tempera-
ture (tested for 96 h)
– 4 °F to +158 °F or –20 °C to +70 °C (legibility
of display may be restricted from +131 °F or
+55 °C)
Recommended permanent operating tem-
perature (acc. to IEC 60255-6)
23 °F to +131 °F or –5 °C to +55 °C
Limiting Temperatures for Storage –13 °F to +131 °F or –25 °C to +55 °C
Limiting temperatures for transport –13 °F to +185 °F or –25 °C to +70 °C
Store and transport the device with factory packing!
1) UL–certified according to Standard 508 (Industrial Control Equipment):
Limiting temperatures for normal operation
(i.e. output relays not energized)
–4 °F to +158 °F or –20 °C to +70 °C
Limiting temperatures with maximum load
(max. cont. permissible energization of
inputs and outputs)
23 °F to +104 °F or –5 °C to +40 °C
Permissible humidity Mean value per year ≤ 75 % relative humidity;
on 56 days of the year up to 93 % relative hu-
midity; condensation must be avoided!
Siemens recommends that all devices be installed such that they are not exposed to direct
sunlight, nor subject to large fluctuations in temperature that may cause condensation to
occur.
The protective device is designed for use in an industrial environment and an electrical utility
environment. Proper installation procedures should be followed to ensure electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC).
In addition, the following is recommended:
• All contacts and relays that operate in the same cubicle, cabinet, or relay panel as the nu-
merical protective device should, as a rule, be equipped with suitable surge suppression
components.
• For substations with operating voltages of 100 kV and above, all external cables should be
shielded with a conductive shield grounded at both ends. For substations with lower oper-
ating voltages, no special measures are normally required.
• Do not withdraw or insert individual modules or boards while the protective device is ener-
gized. In withdrawn condition, some components are electrostatically endangered; during
handling the ESD standards (for Electrostatic Sensitive Devices) must be observed. They
are not endangered when inserted into the case.
4.1 General Device Data
135
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
4.1.9 Certifications
4.1.10 Construction
UL Listing UL recognition
6MD63**-*B***-**** Models with threaded
terminals
6MD63**-*A***-**** Models with plug–in
terminals
6MD63**-*C***-**** 6MD63**-*D***-****
6MD63**-*E***-**** 6MD63**-*G***-****
6MD63**-*F***-****
Case 7XP20
Dimensions See dimensional
drawings, Section
4.6
Weight (maximum number of components ) approx.
In surface mounting, housing size 1/215.4 pounds (7.5 kg)
In surface mounting, housing size 1/133.1 pounds (15 kg)
In flush mounting, housing size 1/214.3 pounds (6.5 kg)
In flush mounting, housing size 1/129 pounds (13 kg)
In housing for detached operator panel, housing size 1/218 pounds (8.0 kg)
In housing for detached operator panel, housing size 1/133.1 pounds (15 kg)
Detached operator panel 4.41 pounds (2.5 kg)
Degree of protection acc. to IEC 60529
For the equipment
In the surface mounting housing IP 51
In flush mounting housing and in model with detached operator panel
– front IP 51
– rear IP 50
For personal protection IP 2x with cover cap
UL-certification conditions “For use on a Flat
Surface of a Type 1
Enclosure”
4 Technical Data
136 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
4.2 Breaker Control
Number of Controlled Switching Devices Depends on the number of binary inputs and
outputs available
Interlocking Freely programmable interlocking
Messages Feedback messages; closed, open, intermediate
position
Control Commands Single command / double command
Switching Command to Circuit Breaker 1-, 11/2 - and 2-pole
Programmable Logic Controller PLC logic, graphic input tool
Local Control Control via menu control
assignment of function keys
Remote Control Using Communications Interfaces
Using a substation automation and control system
(e.g. SICAM)
Using DIGSI® (e.g. via Modem)
4.3 RTD Boxes for Overload Detection
137
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
4.3 RTD Boxes for Overload Detection
Temperature Detectors
Operational Measured Values
Thresholds for Indications
Connectable RTD-boxes 1 or 2
Number of temperature detectors per
RTD-box
Max. 6
Type of measurement Pt 100 Ω or Ni 100 Ω or Ni 120 Ω
selectable 2 or 3 phase connection
Mounting identification “Oil” or “Ambient” or “Stator” or “Bearing” or “Other”
Number of Measuring Points maximal of 12 temperature measuring points
Temperature Unit °C or °F, adjustable
Measuring Range
- for Pt 100
- for Ni 100
- for Ni 120
–199 °C to 800 °C (–326 °F to 1472 °F)
–54 °C to 278 °C (–65 °F to 532 °F)
–52 °C to 263 °C (–62 °F to 505 °F)
Resolution 1 °C or 1 °F
Tolerance ± 0.5 % of measured value ±1 digit
For each measuring point:
Stage 1 –58 °F to 482 °F or –50 °C
to 250 °C
or ∞ (no indication)
oder ∞ (keine Meldung)
(in increments of 1 °C)
(in increments of 1 °F)
Stage 2 –58 °F to 482 °F or –50 °C
to 250 °C
or ∞ (no indication)
or ∞ (no indication)
(in increments of 1 °C)
(in increments of 1 °F)
4 Technical Data
138 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
4.4 User-Defined Functions (CFC)
Function Modules and Possible Assignments to Task Levels
Function Module Description Run-Time Level
MW_
BEARB
PLC1_
BEARB
PLC_
BEARB
SFS_
BEARB
ABSVALUE Magnitude calculation X — — —
ADD addition X X X X
ALARM Alarm clock X X X X
AND AND - Gate X X X X
BLINK Blink-Baustein X X X X
BOOL_TO_CO Boolean to Control
(conversion)
—X X—
BOOL_TO_DL Boolean to Double
Point (conversion)
—X XX
BOOL_TO_IC Bool to internal SI,
conversion
—X XX
BUILD_DI Create Double Point
annunciation
—X XX
CMD_CANCEL Command cancelled X X X X
CMD_CHAIN Switching sequence — X X —
CMD_INF Command information — — — X
COMPARE Metered value compar-
ison
XXXX
CONNECT Connection — X X X
COUNTER Counter X X X X
D_FF D- Flipflop — X X X
D_FF_MEMO status memory for
restart
XXXX
DI_TO_BOOL Double Point to
Boolean (conversion)
—X XX
DINT_TO_REAL Adapter X X X X
DIV division X X X X
DM_DECODE Decode double point
indication
XXXX
DYN_OR dynamic or X X X X
INT_TO_REAL Conversion X X X X
LIVE_ZERO Live-zero, non linear
Curve
X———
LONG_TIMER Timer (max.1193h) X X X X
LOOP Feedback loop X X X X
LOWER_SETPOINT Lower limit X — — —
MUL multiplication X X X X
NAND NAND - Gate X X X X
NEG Negator X X X X
NOR NOR - Gate X X X X
OR OR - Gate X X X X
POI_ZW_ST_LNK — — — X X X X
4.4 User-Defined Functions (CFC)
139
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
General Limits
Device-specific Limits
POO_ZW_ST_LNK — — — X X X X
REAL_TO_DINT Adapter X X X X
REAL_TO_INT Conversion X X X X
RISE_DETECT Rise detector X X X X
RS_FF RS- Flipflop — X X X
SQUARE_ROOT root extractor X X X X
SR_FF SR- Flipflop — X X X
SUB substraction X X X X
TIMER Timer — X X —
TIMER_SHORT Simple timer — X X —
UPPER_SETPOINT Upper limit X — — —
X_OR XOR - Gate X X X X
ZERO_POINT Zero supression X — — —
Function Module Description Run-Time Level
MW_
BEARB
PLC1_
BEARB
PLC_
BEARB
SFS_
BEARB
Designation Limit Comments
Maximum number of all CFC charts
considering all task levels
32 When the limit is exceeded, an error
message is output by the device. Conse-
quently, the device is put into monitoring
mode. The red ERROR-LED lights up.
Maximum number of all CFC charts
considering one task level
16 Only Error Message
(record in device fault log, evolving fault in
processing procedure)
Maximum number of all CFC inputs
considering all charts
400 When the limit is exceeded, an error
message is output by the device. Conse-
quently, the device is put into monitoring
mode. The red ERROR-LED lights up.
Maximum number of inputs of one
chart for each task level (number of
unequal information items of the left
border per task level)
400 Only fault annunciation (record in device
fault log); here the number of elements of
the left border per task level is counted.
Since the same information is indicated at
the border several times, only unequal infor-
mation is to be counted.
Maximum number of reset-resistant
flipflops
D_FF_MEMO
350 When the limit is exceeded, an error
message is output by the device. Conse-
quently, the device is put into monitoring
mode. The red ERROR-LED lights up.
Designation Limit Comments
Maximum number of synchronous
changes of chart inputs per task level
50 When the limit is exceeded, an error
message is output by the device. Conse-
quently, the device is put into monitoring
mode. The red ERROR-LED lights up.
Maximum number of chart outputs per
task level
150
4 Technical Data
140 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Additional Limits
1) When the limit is exceeded, an error message is output by the device. Consequently, the
device starts monitoring. The red ERROR-LED lights up.
2) The following condition applies for the maximum number of timers: (2 · number of TIMER +
number of TIMER_SHORT) < 30. TIMER and TIMER_SHORT hence share the available
timer resources within the frame of this inequation. The limit does not apply to the
LONG_TIMER.
3) The time values for the blocks TIMER and TIMER_SHORT must not be selected shorter than
the time resolution of the device, as the blocks will not then start with the starting pulse.
Maximum Number of TICKS in the Task Levels
1) When the sum of TICKS of all blocks exceeds the limits before-mentioned, an error message
is output by CFC.
Additional limits 1) for the following CFC blocks:
Sequence Level Maximum Number of Modules in the Task Levels
TIMER2) 3) TIMER_SHORT2) 3) CMD_CHAIN
NW_NEAR — — —
LP_NEAR 15 30 20
PLAN_NEAR
S_NEAR — — —
Task Level Limit in TICKS 1)
MW_BEARB (Measured Value Processing) 2536
PLC1_BEARB (Slow PLC Processing) 300
PLC_BEARB (Fast PLC Processing) 130
SFS_BEARB (Interlocking) 2173
4.4 User-Defined Functions (CFC)
141
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Processing Times in TICKS required by the Individual Elements
Configurable in Matrix
Element Number of TICKS
Module, basic requirement 5
Each input from the 3rd additional input for generic blocks 1
Connection to an input signal 6
Connection to an output signal 7
Additional for each chart 1
Switching sequence CM_CHAIN 34
status memory for restart D_OFF_MEMO 6
Feedback loop LOOP 8
Decode double point indication DM_DECODE 8
dynamic or D_OR 6
addition ADD 26
substraction SUB 26
multiplication MU 26
division IV 54
root extractor SQUARE_ROOT 83
In addition to the defined presetting, indications and mesaured values can be freely configured
to buffers, presettings can be removed. Not including important, explicitely defined indications
such as general indication.
4 Technical Data
142 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
4.5 Additional Functions
Operational Measured Values
Currents
IA; IB; IC
Positive sequence component I1
Negative sequence component I2
IG or 3I0
in A (kA) primary and in A secondary or in % INom
Range
Tolerance 1)
10 % to 200 % INom
1 % of measured value, or 0.5 % INom
Phase-to-ground voltages
VA-N, VB-N, VC-N
Phase-to-phase voltages
VA-B, VB-C, VC-A
VN or V0
Positive Sequence Component V1
Negative Sequence Component V2
in kV primary, in V secondary or in % of VNom
Range
Tolerance 1)
10 % to 120 % of VNom
1 % of measured value, or 0.5 % of VNom
S, apparent power in kVAr (MVAr or GVAr) primary and in % of SNom
Range
Tolerance 1)
0 % to 120 % SNom
2% of S
Nom
For V/VNom and I/INom = 50 to 120 %
P, Active Power with sign, total and phase-segregated in kW (MW or
GW) primary and in % SNom
Range
Tolerance 1)
0 % to 120 % SNom
3% of S
Nom
For V/VNom and I/INom = 50 to 120 % and
|cosϕ| = 0.707 to 1
With SNom =√3 · VNom · INom
Q, Reactive Power with sign, total and phase-segregated in kVAr (MVAr
or GVAr) primary and in % SNom
Range
Tolerance 1)
0 % to 120 % SNom
3% of S
Nom
For V/VNom and I/INom = 50 to 120 % and | sin ϕ| =
0.707 to 1
With SNom =√3 · VNom · INom
cos ϕ, power factor total and phase-segregated
Range
Tolerance 1)
–1 to +1
5 % for | cos ϕ | ≥ 0.707
Frequencies f in Hz
Range
Tolerance 1)
fNom ± 5Hz
20 mHz
4.5 Additional Functions
143
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
1) At nominal frequency
Long-Term Averages
Min / Max Report
Measuring transducer
Operating Range
Accuracy Range
To ler an c e 1)
0 mA to 24 mA
1 mA to 20 mA
1.5%, relative to nominal value of 20 mA
For Standard Usage of the Measurement Transducer for Pressure and Temperature
Monitoring:
Operating Measured Value
Pressure
Pressure in hPa
Operating Range (Preset-
ting)
0 hPa to 1200 hPa
Operating Measured Value
Temperature
Tem p in °C
Operating Range (Preset-
ting)
0 °C to 240 °C
Operating Range (Preset-
ting)
0 °C to 240 °C
RTD-Box See section (RTD-Boxes for Temperature Detection)
Time Window 5, 15, 30 or 60 minutes
Frequency of Updates Adjustable
Long-Term Averages
of Currents
of Real Power
of Reactive Power
of Apparent Power
IAdmd; IBdmd; ICdmd; I1dmd in A (kA)
Pdmd in W (kW, MW)
Qdmd in VAr (kVAr, MVAr)
Sdmd in VAr (kVAr, MVAr)
Report of Measured Values With date and time
Reset automatic Time of day adjustable (in minutes, 0 to 1439 min)
Time frame and starting time adjustable (in days,
1 to 365 days, and ∞)
Reset manual Using binary input
Using keypad
Using communication
Min/Max Values for Current IA; IB; IC;
I1 (positive sequence component)
Min/Max Values for Voltages VA-N; VB-N; VC-N
V1 (positive sequence component);
VA-B; VB-C; VC-A
Min/Max Values for Power S, P; Q, cos ϕ; frequency
Min/Max Values for Mean Values IAdmd; IBdmd; ICdmd;
I1dmd (positive sequence component);
Sdmd; Pdmd; Qdmd
4 Technical Data
144 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Local Measured Values Monitoring
Time Stamping
Energy meter
1) At nominal frequency
Current Asymmetry Imax/Imin > balance factor, for I > Ibalance limit
Voltage Asymmetry Vmax/Vmin > balance factor, for V > Vlim
Current Sum | iA + iB + iC + kI · iN | > limit value, with
Current Phase Sequence Clockwise (ABC) / counter-clockwise (ACB)
Voltage Phase Sequence Clockwise (ABC) / counter-clockwise (ACB)
Limit Value Monitoring IA > limit value IAdmd>
IB > limit value IBdmd>
IC > limit value ICdmd>
I1 > limit value I1dmd>
IL< limit value IL<
cos ϕ < lower limit value |cos ϕ |<
P > limit value of real power |Pdmd | >
Q > limit value of reactive power | Qdmd | >
S > limit value of apparent power Sdmd >
Pressure < lower limit value Press<
Temperature > limit value Temp>
Resolution for Event Log 1 ms
Maximum Time Deviation (Internal Clock) 0.01 %
Battery Lithium battery 3 V/1 Ah, type CR 1/2 AA
Message “Battery Fault” for insufficient
battery charge
Meter Values for Energy
Wp, Wq (real and reactive energy)
In kWh (MWh or GWh) and in kVARh (MVARh or
GVARh)
Range
To ler an c e 1)
28 bit or 0 to 2 68 435 455 decimal for IEC 60870-
5-103 (VDEW protocol) 31 bit or 0 to
2 147 483 647 decimal for other protocols (other
than VDEW)
≤ 5% for I > 0,5 INom, V > 0.5 VNom and
|cosϕ| ≥ 0.707
4.5 Additional Functions
145
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Invertable Measured Power Values
1) through dependence on the directly affected measured values
Statistics
Operating Hours Counter
Commissioning Startup Aids
IEC 61850 GOOSE (inter-relay communication)
Directly affected measured values Indirectly affected measured values1)
641 “P =” Measured value P
(Active Power)
834 “P dmd =” Mean value P =
642 “Q =” Measured value Q
(Reactive Power)
835 “Q dmd =” Mean value Q =
901 “PF =” cos (PHI) power factor
=
845 “PdMin=” Minimum of mean value
P =
846 “PdMax=” Maximum of mean
value P =
847 “QdMin=” Minimum of mean value
Q =
848 “QdMax=” Maximum of mean
value Q =
876 “Pmin=” Minimum of active
power P =
877 “Pmax=” Maximum of active
power P =
878 “Qmin=” Minimum of reactive
value Q =
879 “Qmax=” Maximum of reactive
value Q =
884 “PF Max=” Maximum of cos (PHI)
power factor =
885 “PF Min=” Minimum of cos (PHI)
power factor =
Saved Number of Trips Up to 9 digits
Display Range Up to 7 digits
Criterion Current exceeds an adjustable current threshold
(I ≥ 0.04 · INom)
Phase Rotation Field Check
Operational measured values
Circuit Breaker / Switching Device Test
The communication service GOOSE of IEC 61850 is qualified for switchgear interlocking.
4 Technical Data
146 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Clock
Time Synchronization DCF 77/ IRIG B-Signal (telegram format IRIG-
B000)
Binary Input
Communication
Operating Modes for Time Tracking
No. Operating Mode Explanations
1 Internal Internal synchronization using RTC (default)
2 IEC 60870-5-103 External synchronization using system interface
(IEC 60870-5-103)
3 PROFIBUS FMS External synchronization using PROFIBUS inter-
face
4 Time signal IRIG B External synchronization using IRIG B
5 Time signal DCF77 External synchronization using DCF 77
6 Time signal Sync. box External synchronization using SIMEAS Sync.
box
7 Pulse via binary input External synchronization with pulse via binary
input
8 Field bus (DNP, Modbus) External synchronization using field bus
9 NTP (IEC 61850) External synchronization using system interface
(IEC 61850)
4.6 Dimensions
147
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
4.6 Dimensions
4.6.1 Panel Flush and Cubicle Mounting (Housing Size 1/2)
Figure 4-1 Dimensional drawing of a 6MD63 for panel flush or cubicle mounting (housing size 1/2)
4 Technical Data
148 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
4.6.2 Panel Flush and Cubicle Mounting (Housing Size 1/1)
Figure 4-2 Dimensional drawing of a 6MD63 for panel flush or cubicle mounting (housing size 1/1)
4.6 Dimensions
149
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
4.6.3 Panel Surface Mounting (Housing Size 1/2)
Figure 4-3 Dimensional drawing for panel surface mounting (housing size 1/2)
4.6.4 Panel Surface Mounting (Housing Size 1/1)
Figure 4-4 Dimensional drawing for panel surface mounting (housing size 1/1)
4 Technical Data
150 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
4.6.5 Panel Surface Mounting with Detached Operator Panel or without Operator
Panel (Housing Size 1/2)
Figure 4-5 Dimensions of a 6MD63 for panel surface mounting with detached operator panel or without operator panel
(housing size 1/2)
4.6 Dimensions
151
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
4.6.6 Panel Surface Mounting with Detached Operator Panel or without Operator
Panel (Housing Size 1/1)
Figure 4-6 Dimensions of a 6MD63 for panel surface mounting with detached operator panel or without operator panel
(housing size 1/1)
4 Technical Data
152 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
4.6.7 Detached Operator Panel
Figure 4-7 Dimensional drawing of a detached operator panel
4.6 Dimensions
153
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
4.6.8 D-Subminiature Connector of Dongle Cable (Panel Flush or Cubicle Door
Cutout)
Figure 4-8 Dimensions of panel flush or cubicle door cutout of D-subminiature female con-
nector of dongle cable
■
4 Technical Data
154 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
1556MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Appendix A
This appendix is primarily a reference for the experienced user. This section provides
ordering information for the models of this device. Connection diagrams for indicating
the terminal connections of the models of this device are included. Following the
general diagrams are diagrams that show the proper connections of the devices to
primary equipment in many typical power system configurations. Tables with all set-
tings and all information available in this device equipped with all options are provided.
Default settings are also given.
A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories 156
A.2 Terminal Assignments 161
A.3 Connection Examples 194
A.4 Current Transformer Requirements 203
A.5 Default Settings 206
A.6 Protocol-dependent Functions 213
A.7 Functional Scope 214
A.8 Settings 215
A.9 Information List 220
A.10 Group Alarms 227
A.11 Measured Values 228
A Appendix
156 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories
A.1.1 Ordering Information
A.1.1.1 6MD63 V4.6 (current release.../EE)
Input /Output Unit
with Local Control
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Supplemen-
tary
6MD6 3 ––AA0 +
Housing, Binary Inputs and Outputs, Measuring Transducer Pos. 6
Housing 1/2 19'', 11 BI, 8 BO, 1 Live Status Contact 1
Housing 1/2 19'', 24 BI, 11 BO, 2 High-duty relays (4 Contacts), 1 Live Status Contact 2
Housing 1/2 19'', 20 BI, 11 BO, 2 TD, 2 High-duty relays (4 Contacts), 1 Live Status Contact 3
Housing 1/2 19'', 20 BI, 6 BO, 2 High-duty relays (4 Contacts), 1 Live Status Contact (only available if "0" is at
position 7)
4
Housing 1/1 19'', 37 BI, 14 BO, 4 High-duty relays (8 Contacts), 1 Live Status Contact 5
Housing 1/1 19'', 33 BI, 14 BO, 2 TD, 4 High-duty relays (8 Contacts), 1 Live Status Contact 6
Housing 1/2 19'', 33 BI, 9 BO, 4 High-duty relays (8 Contacts), 1 Live Status Contact (only available if "0" is at
position 7)
7
Nominal Current Pos. 7
no analog measurement quantities (only available if "4" or "7" is at position 6) 0
IPh = 1 A, IN = 1 A 1
IPh = 5 A, IN = 5 A 5
Power Supply, Binary Input, Pickup Threshold Setting Pos. 8
24 to 48 VDC, Binary Input Threshold 19 VDC 2
60 to 125 VDC, Binary Input Threshold 19 VDC 4
110 to 250 VDC, 115 to 230 VAC, Binary Input Threshold 88 VDC 5
Construction Pos. 9
Surface-mounting case, plug-in terminals, detached operator panel
Installation in a low-voltage compartment
A
Surface mounting case for panel, 2 tier terminals top/bottom B
Surface-mounting case, screw-type terminals (direct connection / ring and spade lugs),
detached operator panel, installation in a low voltage compartment
C
Flush mounting case, plug-in terminals (2/3-pin connector) D
Flush mounting case, screw-type terminals (direct connection / ring and spade lugs) E
Surface-mounting case, screw-type terminals (direct connection / ring and spade lugs),
without operator panel, installation in a low-voltage compartment
F
Surface-mounting case, plug-in terminals, without operator panel
Installation in a low-voltage compartment
G
A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories
157
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
1) Cannot be delivered in connection with 9th digit = "B". If the optical interface is required you
must order the following: 11th digit = 4 (RS485) and in addition, the associated converter
2) Cannot be delivered in connection with 9th digit = "B".
3) In the surface mounting case with 2 tier terminals as of January 2005
4) Deliverable as of April 2005
1) The converter requires an operating voltage of 24 VDC. If the available operating voltage is
> 24 VDC the additional power supply 7XV5810–0BA00 is required.
Region-specific Default / Language Settings and Function Versions Pos.10
Region DE, 50 Hz, IEC, Language German (Language can be changed) A
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, Language English (Language can be changed) B
Region US, 60 Hz, ANSI, Language American English (Language can be changed) C
Region FR, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, Language French(Language can be changed) D
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, Language Spanish (Language can be changed) E
System Interface (Rear Side, Port B) Pos.11
No system interface 0
IEC-Protocol, electrical RS232 1
IEC-Protocol, electrical RS485 2
IEC-Protocol, Optical, 820 nm, ST-Connector 3
Profibus FMS Slave, electrical RS485 4
Profibus FMS Slave, Optical, Single Ring, ST-Connector 1) 5 1)
Profibus FMS Slave, Optical, Double Ring, ST-Connector 1) 6 1)
For further interface options see Additional Information in the following 9
Additional information to further system interfaces (device rear, port B) Supple-
mentary
Profibus DP Slave, RS485 + L 0 A
Profibus DP Slave, 820 nm, Optical Double Ring, ST–Connector 1) + L 0 B 1)
Modbus RS485 + L 0 D
Modbus, 820 nm, Optical, ST–Connector 2) + L 0 E 2)
DNP3.0, RS485 + L 0 G
DNP3.0, 820 nm, Optical, ST–Connector 2) + L 0 H 2)
IEC 61850, Ethernet electrical, double, RJ45-Connector (EN 100) 3) + L 0 R 3)
IEC 61850, Ethernet optical, double, ST-Connector (EN 100) 2)4) + L 0 S 2)4)
Converter Order No. Use
SIEMENS OLM1) 6GK1502–2CB10 For single ring
SIEMENS OLM1) 6GK1502–3CB10 For double ring
A Appendix
158 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
1) RTD-box 7XV5662–*AD10
2) If you want to run the RTD-Box at an optical interface, you need also the RS485–FO–con-
verter 7XV5650–0*A00.
DIGSI 4/Modem Interface (Rear Side, Port C) Pos.12
No DIGSI interface at the back 0
DIGSI/Modem, electrical RS232 1
DIGSI, Modem, RTD-Box 1), Electrical RS485 2
DIGSI 4, Modem, RTD-Box 1), Optical 820 nm, ST-Connector 2) 3
Measuring Pos.13
without measuring values 0
Slave pointer, Average values, Min/Max values (Only available if “1” or “5” is at position 7) 2
A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories
159
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
A.1.2 Accessories
Exchangeable In-
terface Modules
Name Order No.
RS232 C53207-A351-D641-1
RS485 C53207-A351-D642-1
FO 820 nm C53207-A351-D643-1
Profibus FMS RS485 C53207-A351-D603-1
Profibus FMS double ring C53207-A351-D606-1
Profibus FMS single ring C53207-A351-D609-1
Profibus DP RS485 C53207-A351-D611-1
Profibus DP double ring C53207-A351-D613-1
Modbus RS485 C53207-A351-D621-1
Modbus 820 nm C53207-A351-D623-1
DNP 3.0 RS485 C53207-A351-D631-3
DNP 3.0 820 nm C53207-A351-D633-3
Ethernet electrical (EN 100) C53207–A351–D675–1
RTD-Box (Resis-
tance Temperature
Detector)
Name Order No.
RTD-box, Vaux = 24 to 60 V AC/DC 7XV5662–2AD10–0000
RTD-box, Vaux = 90 to 240 V AC/DC 7XV5662–5AD10–0000
RS485/Fibre Optic
Converter
RS485/Fibre Optic Converter Order No.
820 nm; FC–Connector 7XV5650–0AA00
820 nm; with ST–Connector 7XV5650–0BA00
Terminal Block
Covering Caps
Covering cap for terminal block type Order No.
18 pin voltage terminal, 12 pin current terminal block C73334-A1-C31-1
12-terminal voltage, 8-terminal current block C73334-A1-C32-1
Short Circuit Links Short circuit links for terminal type Order No.
Voltage terminal, 18-terminal, or 12-terminal C73334-A1-C34-1
Current terminal,12-terminal, or 8-terminal C73334-A1-C33-1
A Appendix
160 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Female Plugs Connector Type Order No.
2-pin C73334-A1-C35-1
3-pin C73334-A1-C36-1
Mounting Rail for
19"- Racks
Name Order No.
Angle Strip (Mounting Rail) C73165-A63-C200-3
Battery Lithium battery 3 V/1 Ah, type CR 1/2 AA Order No.
VARTA 6127 101 501
Interface Cable Interface cable between PC or SIPROTEC device Order No.
Cable with 9-pin male/female connections 7XV5100-4
Operating Software
DIGSI® 4
DIGSI® protection operation and configuration software 4 Order No.
DIGSI® 4, basic version with licenses for 10 PCs 7XS5400-0AA00
DIGSI® 4, complete version with all option packages 7XS5402-0AA0
Display Editor Software for creating basic and power system control pic-
tures (option package of the complete version of DIGSI® 4) Order No.
Display Editor 4; Full version with license for 10 PCs 7XS5420-0AA0
Graphic Tools Graphic Tools 4 Order No.
Full version with license for 10 PCs 7XS5430-0AA0
DIGSI REMOTE 4 Software for remotely operating protective devices via a
modem (and possibly a star connector) using DIGSI® 4
(option package of the complete version of DIGSI® 4) Order No.
DIGSI REMOTE 4; Full version with license for 10 PCs;
Language: German 7XS5440-1AA0
SIMATIC CFC 4 Graphical software for setting interlocking (latching)
control conditions and creating additional functions (option
package of the complete version of DIGSI® 4) Order No.
SIMATIC CFC 4; Full version with license for 10 PCs 7XS5450-0AA0
A.2 Terminal Assignments
161
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
A.2 Terminal Assignments
A.2.1 Panel Flush and Cubicle Mounting
6MD631*-*D/E
Figure A-1 Connection diagram for 6MD631*-*D/E (panel flush mounting)
A Appendix
162 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
6MD632*-*D/E
Figure A-2 Connection diagram for 6MD632*-*D/E (panel flush mounting or cubicle
mounting)
A.2 Terminal Assignments
163
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
6MD633*-*D/E
Figure A-3 Connection diagram for 6MD633*-*D/E (panel flush mounting or cubicle
mounting)
A Appendix
164 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
6MD634*-*D/E
Figure A-4 Connection diagram for 6MD634*-*D/E (panel flush mounting or cubicle
mounting)
A.2 Terminal Assignments
165
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
6MD635*-*D/E
Figure A-5 Connection diagram for 6MD635*-*D/E (panel flush mounting or cubicle
mounting)
A Appendix
166 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
6MD636*-*D/E
Figure A-6 Connection diagram for 6MD636*-*D/E (panel flush mounting or cubicle
mounting)
A.2 Terminal Assignments
167
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
6MD637*-*D/E
Figure A-7 Connection diagram for 6MD637*-*D/E (panel flush mounting or cubicle
mounting)
A Appendix
168 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
A.2.2 Panel Surface Mounting
6MD631*-*B
Figure A-8 Connection diagram for 6MD631*-*B (panel surface mounting)
A.2 Terminal Assignments
169
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
6MD632*-*B
Figure A-9 Connection diagram for 6MD632*-*B (panel surface mounting)
A Appendix
170 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
6MD633*-*B
Figure A-10 Connection diagram for 6MD633*-*B (panel surface mounting)
A.2 Terminal Assignments
171
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
6MD634*-*B
Figure A-11 Connection diagram for 6MD634*-*B (panel surface mounting)
A Appendix
172 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
6MD637*-*B
Figure A-12 Connection diagram for 6MD637*-*B (panel surface mounting)
A.2 Terminal Assignments
173
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
6MD631/2/3/4/7*-*B
(up to release
.../CC)
Figure A-13 Connection diagram 6MD631/2/3/4/7*-*B up to release .../CC (panel
surface mounting)
A Appendix
174 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
6MD631/2/3/4/7*-*B
(release .../DD and
higher)
Figure A-14 Connection diagram for 6MD631/2/3/4/7*-*B up to release .../DD (panel
surface mounting)
A.2 Terminal Assignments
175
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
6MD635*-*B
Figure A-15 Connection diagram for 6MD635*-*B (panel surface mounting)
A Appendix
176 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
6MD636*-*B
Figure A-16 Connection diagram for 6MD636*-*B (panel surface mounting)
A.2 Terminal Assignments
177
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
6MD635/6*-*B (up
to release .../CC)
Figure A-17 Connection diagram for 6MD635/6*-*B up to release .../CC (panel surface
mounting)
A Appendix
178 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
6MD635/6*-*B (re-
lease .../DD and
higher)
Figure A-18 Connection diagram for 6MD635/6*-*B up to release .../DD (panel
surface mounting)
A.2 Terminal Assignments
179
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
A.2.3 Device with Detached Operator Panel
6MD631*-*A/C
Figure A-19 Connection diagram for 6MD631*-*A/C (panel surface mounting with
detached operator panel)
A Appendix
180 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
6MD632*-*A/C
Figure A-20 Connection diagram for 6MD632*-*A/C (panel surface mounting with
detached operator panel)
A.2 Terminal Assignments
181
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
6MD633*-*A/C
Figure A-21 Connection diagram for 6MD633*-*A/C (panel surface mounting with
detached operator panel)
A Appendix
182 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
6MD634*-*A/C
Figure A-22 Connection diagram for 6MD634*-*A/C (panel surface mounting with
detached operator panel)
A.2 Terminal Assignments
183
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
6MD635*-*A/C
Figure A-23 Connection diagram for 6MD635*-*A/C (panel surface mounting with
detached operator panel)
A Appendix
184 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
6MD636*-*A/C
Figure A-24 Connection diagram for 6MD636*-*A/C (panel surface mounting with
detached operator panel)
A.2 Terminal Assignments
185
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
6MD637*-*A/C
Figure A-25 Connection diagram for 6MD637*-*A/C (panel surface mounting with
detached operator panel)
A Appendix
186 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
A.2.4 Mounting without Operator Panel
6MD631*-*F/G
Figure A-26 Connection diagram for 6MD631*-*F/G (devices for panel surface mounting
without operator panel)
A.2 Terminal Assignments
187
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
6MD632*-*F/G
Figure A-27 Connection diagram for 6MD632*-*F/G (devices for panel surface mounting
without operator panel)
A Appendix
188 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
6MD633*-*F/G
Figure A-28 Connection diagram for 6MD633*-*F/G (devices for panel surface mounting
without operator panel)
A.2 Terminal Assignments
189
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
6MD634*-*F/G
Figure A-29 Connection diagram for 6MD634*-*F/G (devices for panel surface mounting
without operator panel)
A Appendix
190 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
6MD635*-*F/G
Figure A-30 Connection diagram for 6MD635*-*F/G (devices for panel surface mounting
without operator panel)
A.2 Terminal Assignments
191
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
6MD636*-*F/G
Figure A-31 Connection diagram for 6MD636*-*F/G (devices for panel surface mounting
without operator panel)
A Appendix
192 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
6MD637*-*F/G
Figure A-32 Connection diagram for 6MD637*-*F/G (devices for panel surface mounting
without operator panel)
A.2 Terminal Assignments
193
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
A.2.5 Connector Assignment
On the Interfaces
On the Time Syn-
chronization Inter-
face
A Appendix
194 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
A.3 Connection Examples
A.3.1 Current and Voltage Transformers
Figure A-33 Current connections to three current transformers with a starpoint connection
for ground current, normal circuit layout
A.3 Connection Examples
195
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Figure A-34 Current connections to two current transformers - only for ungrounded or com-
pensated networks
A Appendix
196 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Figure A-35 Current connections to three current transformers and a core balance neutral
current transformer for ground current – preferred for effectively or low-resis-
tance grounded networks
A.3 Connection Examples
197
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Figure A-36 Current and voltage connections to three current transformers and three voltage
transformers (phase-ground), normal circuit layout
A Appendix
198 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Figure A-37 Current and voltage connections to three current transformers, two voltage
transformers (phase-phase) and open delta VT for V4
A.3 Connection Examples
199
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Figure A-38 Current and voltage connections to two current transformers and two V-con-
nected voltage transformers, for ungrounded or compensated networks
A Appendix
200 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Figure A-39 Current connections to three current transformers with a starpoint connection
for ground current, two V-connected voltage transformers - only for ungrounded
or compensated networks
A.3 Connection Examples
201
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
A.3.2 Connection Examples for RTD-boxes
Figure A-40 Simplex operation with one RTD-Box; above: optical design (1 FOs); below:
Design with RS485
Figure A-41 Half-duplex with one RTD-Box; above: optical design (1 FOs); below: design
with RS485
A Appendix
202 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Figure A-42 Half-duplex with two RTD-Box; above: optical design (2 FOs); below: design
with RS485
A.3 Connection Examples
203
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
A.4 Current Transformer Requirements
The requirements for phase current transformers are usually determined by the over-
current time protection, particularly by the high-current element settings. Besides,
there is a minimum requirement based on experience.
The recommendations are given according to the standard IEC 60044-1.
The standards IEC 60044-6, BS 3938 and ANSI/IEEE C 57.13 are referred to for con-
verting the requirement into the knee-point voltage and other transformer classes.
A.4.1 Accuracy limiting factors
Effective and Rated
Accuracy Limiting
Factor
Calculation
example according
to IEC 60044–1
Required minimum effective accu-
racy limiting factor
but at least 20
with
KALF’ Minimum effective accuracy limiting
factor
50-2PU Primary pickup value of the high-current
element
IpNom Primary nominal transformer current
Resulting rated accuracy limiting
factor
with
KALF Rated accuracy limiting factor
RBC Connected burden resistance
(device and cables)
RBN Nominal burden resistance
RCt Transformer internal burden resistance
IsNom = 1 A
KALF’ = 20
RBC = 0.6 Ω (device and cables)
RCt = 3 Ω
RBN = 5 Ω (5 VA) KALF set to 10,
so that: 5P10, 5 VA
with
IsNom = secondary transformer nominal current
A Appendix
204 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
A.4.2 Class conversion
Table A-1 Conversion into other classes
British Standard BS 3938
ANSI/IEEE C 57.13, class C
IsNom = 5 A (typical value)
IEC 60044-6 (transient response),
class TPS
Classes TPX, TPY, TPZ
K≈ 1
KSSC≈ KALF
Calculated as in Chapter A.4.1 where:
KSSC≈ KALF
TP depending on power system and specified closing
sequence
with
VkKnee-point voltage
RCt Internal burden resistance
RBN Nominal burden resistance
IsNom secondary nominal transformer current
KALF Rated accuracy limiting factor
Vs.t.max sec. terminal volt. at 20 IpNom
Val sec. magnetization limit voltage
K Dimensioning factor
KSSC Factor symmetr. Rated fault current
TPPrimary time constant
A.3 Connection Examples
205
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
A.4.3 Cable core balance current transformer
General The requirements to the cable core balance current transformer are determined by the
function „sensitive ground fault detection“.
The recommendations are given according to the standard IEC 60044-1.
Requirements
Class accuracy Table A-2 Minimum required class accuracy depending on neutral grounding and function
operating principle
For extremely small ground fault currents it may become necessary to correct the
angle at the device (see function description of „sensitive ground fault detection“).
Transformation ratio, typical
It may be necessary to select a different transformation ratio to
suit the specific power system and thus the amount of the
maximum ground fault current.
60 / 1
Accuracy limiting factor FS = 10
Power 2.5 VA
Starpoint isolated compensated high-resistance
grounded
Function directional Class 1 Class 1 Class 1
Function non-directional Class 3 Class 1 Class 3
A Appendix
206 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
A.5 Default Settings
When the device leaves the factory, a large number of LED indications, binary inputs
and outputs as well as function keys are already preset. They are summarized in the
following tables.
A.5.1 LEDs
Table A-3 LED Indication Presettings
A.5.2 Binary Input
Table A-4 Binary input presettings for all devices and ordering variants
Table A-5 Further binary input presettings for 6MD631*-
LEDs Default function Function No. Description
LED1 Not configured 1 No Function configured
LED2 Not configured 1 No Function configured
LED3 Not configured 1 No Function configured
LED4 Not configured 1 No Function configured
LED5 Not configured 1 No Function configured
LED6 Not configured 1 No Function configured
LED7 Not configured 1 No Function configured
LED8 Brk OPENED Breaker OPENED
LED9 >Door open >Cabinet door open
LED10 >CB wait >CB waiting for Spring charged
LED11 Not configured 1 No Function configured
LED12 Not configured 1 No Function configured
LED13 Not configured 1 No Function configured
LED14 Not configured 1 No Function configured
Binary Input Default function Function No. Description
BI1 Not configured 1 No Function configured
BI2 >Reset LED 5 >Reset LED
BI3 >Light on >Back Light on
BI4 52Breaker 52 Breaker
BI5 52Breaker 52 Breaker
BI6 Disc.Swit. Disconnect Switch
BI7 Disc.Swit. Disconnect Switch
Binary Input Default function Function No. Description
BI21 GndSwit. Ground Switch
BI22 GndSwit. Ground Switch
BI23 >CB ready >CB ready Spring is charged
BI24 >DoorClose >Door closed
A.5 Default Settings
207
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Table A-6 Further binary input presettings for 6MD632*- 6MD633*- 6MD634*- 6MD635*-
6MD636*- 6MD637*-
A.5.3 Binary Output
Table A-7 Output Relay Presettings for All Devices and Ordering Variants
Table A-8 Further Output Relay Presettings for 6MD631*- 6MD632*- 6MD633*-
6MD635*- 6MD636*-
Table A-9 Further Output Relay Presettings for 6MD634*- 6MD637*-
A.5.4 Function Keys
Table A-10 Applies to All Devices and Ordered Variants
Binary Input Default function Function No. Description
BI8 GndSwit. Ground Switch
BI9 GndSwit. Ground Switch
BI11 >CB ready >CB ready Spring is charged
BI12 >DoorClose >Door closed
Binary Output Default function Function No. Description
BO1 52Breaker 52 Breaker
BO2 52Breaker 52 Breaker
BO3 52Breaker 52 Breaker
Binary Output Default function Function No. Description
BO11 GndSwit. Ground Switch
BO12 GndSwit. Ground Switch
BO13 Disc.Swit. Disconnect Switch
BO14 Disc.Swit. Disconnect Switch
Binary Output Default function Function No. Description
BO7 GndSwit. Ground Switch
BO8 GndSwit. Ground Switch
BO9 Disc.Swit. Disconnect Switch
BO10 Disc.Swit. Disconnect Switch
Function Keys Default function Function No. Description
F1 Display of operational indications - -
F2 Display of the primary operational
measured values
--
F3 Not connected - -
F4 Not connected - -
A Appendix
208 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
A.5.5 Default Display
Figure A-43 Default displays for graphic display
A.5 Default Settings
209
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
A.5.6 Pre-defined CFC Charts
Some CFC Charts are already supplied with the SIPROTEC device. Depending on the
variant the following charts may be implemented:
Device and System
Logic
The NEGATOR block assigns the input signal “DataStop” directly to an output. This
is not directly possible without the interconnection of this block.
Figure A-44 Logical Link between Input and Output
Transducer 20 mA
Input
For device variants with integrated measurement transducers, monitoring switching
for the measured quantities supplied by the measurement transducers for pressure
and temperature is provided:
Figure A-45 Processing of the measured quantities supplied by the integrated measurement transducers for pressure
and temperature
A Appendix
210 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Interlocking Standard Interlocking for three switching devices (52, Disc. and GndSw):
Figure A-46 Standard Interlocking For Circuit Breaker, Disconnector and Ground Switch
A.5 Default Settings
211
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Set points MV Using modules on the running sequence ”measured value processing", a low current
monitor for the three phase currents is implemented. The output message is set high
as soon as one of the three phase currents falls below the set threshold:
Figure A-47 Undercurrent monitoring
Blocks of the task level "MW_BEARB" (measured value processing) are used to im-
plement the overcurrent monitoring and the power monitoring.
Figure A-48 Overcurrent monitoring
A Appendix
212 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Figure A-49 Power monitoring
A.6 Protocol-dependent Functions
213
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
A.6 Protocol-dependent Functions
Protocol → IEC 60870–5–
103
IEC 61850
Ethernet (EN
100)
PROFIBUS DP PROFIBUS FMS DNP3.0 1)
Modbus
ASCII/RTU 2)
Addition-
al
Service
Interface
(optional)
Function ↓
Operational Mea-
sured Values
Yes Yes Ye s Yes Ye s Ye s
Metered Values Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Remote Protection
Setting
No Only via ad-
ditional service
interface
No. Only via
additional
service inter-
face
No. Only via addi-
tional service in-
terface
Yes No. Only via addi-
tional service in-
terface
Yes
User-defined Indica-
tions and Switching
Objects
Yes Yes Pre-defined
“User-defined
messages” in
CFC
Yes Pre-defined
“User-defined
messages” in
CFC
Yes
Time Synchroniza-
tion
Via Protocol;
DCF77/IRIG B;
Interface;
Binary Inputs
Via protocol
(NTP);
DCF77/IRIG
B;
Interface;
Binary Inputs
Via DCF77/IRIG
B;
Interface;
Binary Inputs
Via protocol;
DCF77/IRIG B
Interface;
Binary Inputs
Via protocol1);
DCF77/IRIG B;
Interface;
Binary Inputs
—
Messages with Time
Stamp
Yes Yes No Yes Yes 1)
No2)
Yes
Commissioning Aids
Measured Value In-
dication Blocking
Yes Yes No Yes No Yes
Creating Test Mes-
sages
Yes Yes No Yes No Yes
Physical Mode Asynchronous Synchronous Asynchronous Asynchronous Asynchronous —
Transmission Mode Cyclically/Event Cyclical-
ly/Event
Cyclically Cyclically/Event Cyclically/Event1)
cyclically2)
—
Baud rate 4800 to 38400 Up to 100
MBaud
Up to 1.5 MBaud Up to 1.5 MBaud 2400 to 19200 4800 to
115200
Type RS232
RS485
Fiber-optic
cables
Ethernet TP RS485 Optical
fiber
- Double ring
RS485 Optical
fiber
- Simple ring
- Double ring
RS485 Optical
fiber
RS232
RS485
Optical
fiber
A Appendix
214 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
A.7 Functional Scope
Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments
190 RTD-BOX INPUT Disabled
Port C
Disabled External Temperature Input
191 RTD CONNECTION 6 RTD simplex
6 RTD HDX
12 RTD HDX
6 RTD simplex Ext. Temperature Input Connec-
tion Type
A.8 Settings
215
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
A.8 Settings
Addresses which have an appended "A" can only be changed with DIGSI, under "Ad-
ditional Settings".
The table indicates region-specific presettings. Column C (configuration) indicates the
corresponding secondary nominal current of the current transformer.
Addr. Parameter Function C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
201 CT Starpoint P.System Data 1 towards Line
towards Busbar
towards Line CT Starpoint
202 Vnom PRIMARY P.System Data 1 0.10 .. 800.00 kV 12.00 kV Rated Primary Voltage
203 Vnom SECONDARY P.System Data 1 100 .. 225 V 100 V Rated Secondary Voltage (L-L)
204 CT PRIMARY P.System Data 1 10 .. 50000 A 100 A CT Rated Primary Current
205 CT SECONDARY P.System Data 1 1A
5A
1A CT Rated Secondary Current
206A Vph / Vdelta P.System Data 1 1.00 .. 3.00 1.73 Matching ratio Phase-VT To
Open-Delta-VT
209 PHASE SEQ. P.System Data 1 A B C
A C B
A B C Phase Sequence
213 VT Connect. 3ph P.System Data 1 Van, Vbn, Vcn
Vab, Vbc, VGnd
Van, Vbn, Vcn VT Connection, three-phase
214 Rated Frequency P.System Data 1 50 Hz
60 Hz
50 Hz Rated Frequency
217 Ignd-CT PRIM P.System Data 1 1 .. 50000 A 60 A Ignd-CT rated primary current
218 Ignd-CT SEC P.System Data 1 1A
5A
1A Ignd-CT rated secondary current
276 TEMP. UNIT P.System Data 1 Celsius
Fahrenheit
Celsius Unit of temperature measure-
ment
616 Port EN100-Modul 1 Disabled
Port B
Disabled Communication Port
1101 FullScaleVolt. P.System Data 2 0.10 .. 800.00 kV 12.00 kV Measurem:FullScaleVolt-
age(Equipm.rating)
1102 FullScaleCurr. P.System Data 2 10 .. 50000 A 100 A Measurem:FullScaleCur-
rent(Equipm.rating)
1108 P,Q sign P.System Data 2 not reversed
reversed
not reversed P,Q operational measured values
sign
8101 MEASURE. SUPERV Measurem.Superv OFF
ON
ON Measurement Supervision
8102 BALANCE V-LIMIT Measurem.Superv 10 .. 100 V 50 V Voltage Threshold for Balance
Monitoring
8103 BAL. FACTOR V Measurem.Superv 0.58 .. 0.90 0.75 Balance Factor for Voltage
Monitor
8104 BALANCE I LIMIT Measurem.Superv 1A 0.10 .. 1.00 A 0.50 A Current Threshold for Balance
Monitoring
5A 0.50 .. 5.00 A 2.50 A
8105 BAL. FACTOR I Measurem.Superv 0.10 .. 0.90 0.50 Balance Factor for Current
Monitor
8106 Σ I THRESHOLD Measurem.Superv 1A 0.05 .. 2.00 A; ∞0.10 A Summated Current Monitoring
Threshold
5A 0.25 .. 10.00 A; ∞0.50 A
8107 Σ I FACTOR Measurem.Superv 0.00 .. 0.95 0.10 Summated Current Monitoring
Factor
8301 DMD Interval Demand meter 15 Min., 1 Sub
15 Min., 3 Subs
15 Min.,15 Subs
30 Min., 1 Sub
60 Min., 1 Sub
60 Min.,10 Subs
5 Min., 5 Subs
60 Min., 1 Sub Demand Calculation Intervals
8302 DMD Sync.Time Demand meter On The Hour
15 After Hour
30 After Hour
45 After Hour
On The Hour Demand Synchronization Time
8311 MinMax cycRESET Min/Max meter NO
YES
YES Automatic Cyclic Reset Function
A Appendix
216 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
8312 MiMa RESET TIME Min/Max meter 0 .. 1439 min 0 min MinMax Reset Timer
8313 MiMa RESETCYCLE Min/Max meter 1 .. 365 Days 7 Days MinMax Reset Cycle Period
8314 MinMaxRES.START Min/Max meter 1 .. 365 Days 1 Days MinMax Start Reset Cycle in
8315 MeterResolution Energy Standard
Factor 10
Factor 100
Standard Meter resolution
9011A RTD 1 TYPE RTD-Box Not connected
Pt 100 Ω
Ni 120 Ω
Ni 100 Ω
Pt 100 ΩRTD 1: Type
9012A RTD 1 LOCATION RTD-Box Oil
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
Oil RTD 1: Location
9013 RTD 1 STAGE 1 RTD-Box -50 .. 250 °C; ∞100 °C RTD 1: Temperature Stage 1
Pickup
9014 RTD 1 STAGE 1 RTD-Box -58 .. 482 °F; ∞212 °F RTD 1: Temperature Stage 1
Pickup
9015 RTD 1 STAGE 2 RTD-Box -50 .. 250 °C; ∞120 °C RTD 1: Temperature Stage 2
Pickup
9016 RTD 1 STAGE 2 RTD-Box -58 .. 482 °F; ∞248 °F RTD 1: Temperature Stage 2
Pickup
9021A RTD 2 TYPE RTD-Box Not connected
Pt 100 Ω
Ni 120 Ω
Ni 100 Ω
Not connected RTD 2: Type
9022A RTD 2 LOCATION RTD-Box Oil
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
Other RTD 2: Location
9023 RTD 2 STAGE 1 RTD-Box -50 .. 250 °C; ∞100 °C RTD 2: Temperature Stage 1
Pickup
9024 RTD 2 STAGE 1 RTD-Box -58 .. 482 °F; ∞212 °F RTD 2: Temperature Stage 1
Pickup
9025 RTD 2 STAGE 2 RTD-Box -50 .. 250 °C; ∞120 °C RTD 2: Temperature Stage 2
Pickup
9026 RTD 2 STAGE 2 RTD-Box -58 .. 482 °F; ∞248 °F RTD 2: Temperature Stage 2
Pickup
9031A RTD 3 TYPE RTD-Box Not connected
Pt 100 Ω
Ni 120 Ω
Ni 100 Ω
Not connected RTD 3: Type
9032A RTD 3 LOCATION RTD-Box Oil
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
Other RTD 3: Location
9033 RTD 3 STAGE 1 RTD-Box -50 .. 250 °C; ∞100 °C RTD 3: Temperature Stage 1
Pickup
9034 RTD 3 STAGE 1 RTD-Box -58 .. 482 °F; ∞212 °F RTD 3: Temperature Stage 1
Pickup
9035 RTD 3 STAGE 2 RTD-Box -50 .. 250 °C; ∞120 °C RTD 3: Temperature Stage 2
Pickup
9036 RTD 3 STAGE 2 RTD-Box -58 .. 482 °F; ∞248 °F RTD 3: Temperature Stage 2
Pickup
9041A RTD 4 TYPE RTD-Box Not connected
Pt 100 Ω
Ni 120 Ω
Ni 100 Ω
Not connected RTD 4: Type
9042A RTD 4 LOCATION RTD-Box Oil
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
Other RTD 4: Location
9043 RTD 4 STAGE 1 RTD-Box -50 .. 250 °C; ∞100 °C RTD 4: Temperature Stage 1
Pickup
Addr. Parameter Function C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
A.8 Settings
217
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
9044 RTD 4 STAGE 1 RTD-Box -58 .. 482 °F; ∞212 °F RTD 4: Temperature Stage 1
Pickup
9045 RTD 4 STAGE 2 RTD-Box -50 .. 250 °C; ∞120 °C RTD 4: Temperature Stage 2
Pickup
9046 RTD 4 STAGE 2 RTD-Box -58 .. 482 °F; ∞248 °F RTD 4: Temperature Stage 2
Pickup
9051A RTD 5 TYPE RTD-Box Not connected
Pt 100 Ω
Ni 120 Ω
Ni 100 Ω
Not connected RTD 5: Type
9052A RTD 5 LOCATION RTD-Box Oil
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
Other RTD 5: Location
9053 RTD 5 STAGE 1 RTD-Box -50 .. 250 °C; ∞100 °C RTD 5: Temperature Stage 1
Pickup
9054 RTD 5 STAGE 1 RTD-Box -58 .. 482 °F; ∞212 °F RTD 5: Temperature Stage 1
Pickup
9055 RTD 5 STAGE 2 RTD-Box -50 .. 250 °C; ∞120 °C RTD 5: Temperature Stage 2
Pickup
9056 RTD 5 STAGE 2 RTD-Box -58 .. 482 °F; ∞248 °F RTD 5: Temperature Stage 2
Pickup
9061A RTD 6 TYPE RTD-Box Not connected
Pt 100 Ω
Ni 120 Ω
Ni 100 Ω
Not connected RTD 6: Type
9062A RTD 6 LOCATION RTD-Box Oil
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
Other RTD 6: Location
9063 RTD 6 STAGE 1 RTD-Box -50 .. 250 °C; ∞100 °C RTD 6: Temperature Stage 1
Pickup
9064 RTD 6 STAGE 1 RTD-Box -58 .. 482 °F; ∞212 °F RTD 6: Temperature Stage 1
Pickup
9065 RTD 6 STAGE 2 RTD-Box -50 .. 250 °C; ∞120 °C RTD 6: Temperature Stage 2
Pickup
9066 RTD 6 STAGE 2 RTD-Box -58 .. 482 °F; ∞248 °F RTD 6: Temperature Stage 2
Pickup
9071A RTD 7 TYPE RTD-Box Not connected
Pt 100 Ω
Ni 120 Ω
Ni 100 Ω
Not connected RTD 7: Type
9072A RTD 7 LOCATION RTD-Box Oil
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
Other RTD 7: Location
9073 RTD 7 STAGE 1 RTD-Box -50 .. 250 °C; ∞100 °C RTD 7: Temperature Stage 1
Pickup
9074 RTD 7 STAGE 1 RTD-Box -58 .. 482 °F; ∞212 °F RTD 7: Temperature Stage 1
Pickup
9075 RTD 7 STAGE 2 RTD-Box -50 .. 250 °C; ∞120 °C RTD 7: Temperature Stage 2
Pickup
9076 RTD 7 STAGE 2 RTD-Box -58 .. 482 °F; ∞248 °F RTD 7: Temperature Stage 2
Pickup
9081A RTD 8 TYPE RTD-Box Not connected
Pt 100 Ω
Ni 120 Ω
Ni 100 Ω
Not connected RTD 8: Type
9082A RTD 8 LOCATION RTD-Box Oil
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
Other RTD 8: Location
9083 RTD 8 STAGE 1 RTD-Box -50 .. 250 °C; ∞100 °C RTD 8: Temperature Stage 1
Pickup
Addr. Parameter Function C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
A Appendix
218 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
9084 RTD 8 STAGE 1 RTD-Box -58 .. 482 °F; ∞212 °F RTD 8: Temperature Stage 1
Pickup
9085 RTD 8 STAGE 2 RTD-Box -50 .. 250 °C; ∞120 °C RTD 8: Temperature Stage 2
Pickup
9086 RTD 8 STAGE 2 RTD-Box -58 .. 482 °F; ∞248 °F RTD 8: Temperature Stage 2
Pickup
9091A RTD 9 TYPE RTD-Box Not connected
Pt 100 Ω
Ni 120 Ω
Ni 100 Ω
Not connected RTD 9: Type
9092A RTD 9 LOCATION RTD-Box Oil
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
Other RTD 9: Location
9093 RTD 9 STAGE 1 RTD-Box -50 .. 250 °C; ∞100 °C RTD 9: Temperature Stage 1
Pickup
9094 RTD 9 STAGE 1 RTD-Box -58 .. 482 °F; ∞212 °F RTD 9: Temperature Stage 1
Pickup
9095 RTD 9 STAGE 2 RTD-Box -50 .. 250 °C; ∞120 °C RTD 9: Temperature Stage 2
Pickup
9096 RTD 9 STAGE 2 RTD-Box -58 .. 482 °F; ∞248 °F RTD 9: Temperature Stage 2
Pickup
9101A RTD10 TYPE RTD-Box Not connected
Pt 100 Ω
Ni 120 Ω
Ni 100 Ω
Not connected RTD10: Type
9102A RTD10 LOCATION RTD-Box Oil
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
Other RTD10: Location
9103 RTD10 STAGE 1 RTD-Box -50 .. 250 °C; ∞100 °C RTD10: Temperature Stage 1
Pickup
9104 RTD10 STAGE 1 RTD-Box -58 .. 482 °F; ∞212 °F RTD10: Temperature Stage 1
Pickup
9105 RTD10 STAGE 2 RTD-Box -50 .. 250 °C; ∞120 °C RTD10: Temperature Stage 2
Pickup
9106 RTD10 STAGE 2 RTD-Box -58 .. 482 °F; ∞248 °F RTD10: Temperature Stage 2
Pickup
9111A RTD11 TYPE RTD-Box Not connected
Pt 100 Ω
Ni 120 Ω
Ni 100 Ω
Not connected RTD11: Type
9112A RTD11 LOCATION RTD-Box Oil
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
Other RTD11: Location
9113 RTD11 STAGE 1 RTD-Box -50 .. 250 °C; ∞100 °C RTD11: Temperature Stage 1
Pickup
9114 RTD11 STAGE 1 RTD-Box -58 .. 482 °F; ∞212 °F RTD11: Temperature Stage 1
Pickup
9115 RTD11 STAGE 2 RTD-Box -50 .. 250 °C; ∞120 °C RTD11: Temperature Stage 2
Pickup
9116 RTD11 STAGE 2 RTD-Box -58 .. 482 °F; ∞248 °F RTD11: Temperature Stage 2
Pickup
9121A RTD12 TYPE RTD-Box Not connected
Pt 100 Ω
Ni 120 Ω
Ni 100 Ω
Not connected RTD12: Type
9122A RTD12 LOCATION RTD-Box Oil
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
Other RTD12: Location
9123 RTD12 STAGE 1 RTD-Box -50 .. 250 °C; ∞100 °C RTD12: Temperature Stage 1
Pickup
Addr. Parameter Function C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
A.8 Settings
219
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
9124 RTD12 STAGE 1 RTD-Box -58 .. 482 °F; ∞212 °F RTD12: Temperature Stage 1
Pickup
9125 RTD12 STAGE 2 RTD-Box -50 .. 250 °C; ∞120 °C RTD12: Temperature Stage 2
Pickup
9126 RTD12 STAGE 2 RTD-Box -58 .. 482 °F; ∞248 °F RTD12: Temperature Stage 2
Pickup
Addr. Parameter Function C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
A Appendix
220 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
A.9 Information List
Indications for IEC 60 870-5-103 are always reported ON / OFF if they are subject to
general interrogation for IEC 60 870-5-103. If not, they are reported only as ON.
New user-defined indications or such reassigned to IEC 60 870-5-103 are set to ON /
OFF and subjected to general interrogation if the information type is not a spontane-
ous event (“.._Ev”). Further information on messages can be found in detail in the
SIPROTEC® 4 System Description, Order No. E50417-H1176-C151.
In columns “Event Log”, “Trip Log” and “Ground Fault Log” the following applies:
UPPER CASE NOTATION “ON/OFF”: definitely set, not allocatable
lower case notation “on/off”: preset, allocatable
*: not preset, allocatable
<blank>: neither preset nor allocatable
In column “Marked in Oscill.Record” the following applies:
UPPER CASE NOTATION “M”: definitely set, not allocatable
lower case notation “m”: preset, allocatable
*: not preset, allocatable
<blank>: neither preset nor allocatable
No. Description Function Type
of In-
for-
matio
n
Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log ON/OFF
Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF
Ground Fault Log ON/OFF
Marked in Oscill. Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
Information Number
Data Unit
General Interrogation
- >Back Light on (>Light on) Device, General SP on
off
**LEDBIBO
- Reset LED (Reset LED) Device, General IntSP on * * LED BO 160 19 1 No
- Stop data transmission (DataS-
top)
Device, General IntSP on
off
* * LED BO 160 20 1 Yes
- Test mode (Test mode) Device, General IntSP on
off
* * LED BO 160 21 1 Yes
- Feeder GROUNDED (Feeder
gnd)
Device, General IntSP * * * LED BO
- Breaker OPENED (Brk
OPENED)
Device, General IntSP * * * LED BO
- Hardware Test Mode (HWTest-
Mod)
Device, General IntSP on
off
**LEDBO
- Clock Synchronization (Synch-
Clock)
Device, General IntSP
_Ev
** *
- Error FMS FO 1 (Error FMS1) Device, General OUT on
off
* LED BO
- Error FMS FO 2 (Error FMS2) Device, General OUT on
off
* LED BO
- Disturbance CFC (Distur.CFC) Device, General OUT on
off
* LED BO
- Control Authority (Cntrl Auth) Cntrl Authority DP ON
OFF
LED 101 85 1 Yes
- Controlmode LOCAL (ModeLO-
CAL)
Cntrl Authority DP ON
OFF
LED 101 86 1 Yes
A.9 Information List
221
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
- Controlmode REMOTE (ModeR-
EMOTE)
Cntrl Authority IntSP ON
OFF
LED
- 52 Breaker (52Breaker) Control Device CF_D
12
on
off
BO 240 160 20
- 52 Breaker (52Breaker) Control Device DP on
off
BI CB 240 160 1 Yes
- Disconnect Switch (Disc.Swit.) Control Device CF_D
2
on
off
BO 240 161 20
- Disconnect Switch (Disc.Swit.) Control Device DP on
off
BI CB 240 161 1 Yes
- Ground Switch (GndSwit.) Control Device CF_D
2
on
off
BO 240 164 20
- Ground Switch (GndSwit.) Control Device DP on
off
BI CB 240 164 1 Yes
- Interlocking: 52 Open (52 Open) Control Device IntSP *
- Interlocking: 52 Close (52 Close) Control Device IntSP *
- Interlocking: Disconnect switch
Open (Disc.Open)
Control Device IntSP *
- Interlocking: Disconnect switch
Close (Disc.Close)
Control Device IntSP *
- Interlocking: Ground switch Open
(GndSw Open)
Control Device IntSP *
- Interlocking: Ground switch Close
(GndSw Cl.)
Control Device IntSP *
- Unlock data transmission via BI
(UnlockDT)
Control Device IntSP *
- Q2 Open/Close (Q2 Op/Cl) Control Device CF_D
2
on
off
BO 240 162 20
- Q2 Open/Close (Q2 Op/Cl) Control Device DP on
off
BI CB 240 162 1 Yes
- Q9 Open/Close (Q9 Op/Cl) Control Device CF_D
2
on
off
BO 240 163 20
- Q9 Open/Close (Q9 Op/Cl) Control Device DP on
off
BI CB 240 163 1 Yes
- Fan ON/OFF (Fan ON/OFF) Control Device CF_D
2
on
off
BO 240 175 20
- Fan ON/OFF (Fan ON/OFF) Control Device DP on
off
BI CB 240 175 1 Yes
- >CB ready Spring is charged
(>CB ready)
Process Data SP * * LED BI BO CB
- >Door closed (>DoorClose) Process Data SP * * LED BI BO CB
- >Cabinet door open (>Door
open)
Process Data SP on
off
* LED BI BO CB 101 1 1 Yes
- >CB waiting for Spring charged
(>CB wait)
Process Data SP on
off
* LED BI BO CB 101 2 1 Yes
- >No Voltage (Fuse blown) (>No
Volt.)
Process Data SP ON
OFF
* LED BI BO CB 160 38 1 Yes
- >Error Motor Voltage (>Err Mot V) Process Data SP on
off
* LED BI BO CB 240 181 1 Yes
- >Error Control Voltage (>ErrCntr-
lV)
Process Data SP on
off
* LED BI BO CB 240 182 1 Yes
- >SF6-Loss (>SF6-Loss) Process Data SP on
off
* LED BI BO CB 240 183 1 Yes
- >Error Meter (>Err Meter) Process Data SP on
off
* LED BI BO CB 240 184 1 Yes
No. Description Function Type
of In-
for-
matio
n
Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log ON/OFF
Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF
Ground Fault Log ON/OFF
Marked in Oscill. Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
Information Number
Data Unit
General Interrogation
A Appendix
222 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
- >Transformer Temperature (>Tx
Te m p . )
Process Data SP on
off
* LED BI BO CB 240 185 1 Yes
- >Transformer Danger (>Tx
Danger)
Process Data SP on
off
* LED BI BO CB 240 186 1 Yes
- Reset meter (Meter res) Energy IntSP
_Ev
ON BI
- Error Systeminterface (SysIn-
tErr.)
Protocol IntSP on
off
LED BO
- Threshold Value 1 (ThreshVal1) Thresh.-Switch IntSP on
off
LED FC
TN
BO CB
1 No Function configured (Not con-
figured)
Device, General SP * *
2 Function Not Available (Non Exis-
tent)
Device, General SP * *
3 >Synchronize Internal Real Time
Clock (>Time Synch)
Device, General SP_E
v
* * LED BI BO 135 48 1 Yes
5 >Reset LED (>Reset LED) Device, General SP * * * LED BI BO 135 50 1 Yes
009.0100 Failure EN100 Modul (Failure
Modul)
EN100-Modul 1 IntSP on
off
* LED BO
009.0101 Failure EN100 Link Channel 1
(Ch1) (Fail Ch1)
EN100-Modul 1 IntDP on
off
*
009.0102 Failure EN100 Link Channel 2
(Ch2) (Fail Ch2)
EN100-Modul 1 IntDP on
off
*
15 >Test mode (>Test mode) Device, General SP * * * LED BI BO 135 53 1 Yes
16 >Stop data transmission
(>DataStop)
Device, General SP * * * LED BI BO 135 54 1 Yes
51 Device is Operational and Pro-
tecting (Device OK)
Device, General OUT on
off
* * LED BO 135 81 1 Yes
55 Reset Device (Reset Device) Device, General OUT on * *
56 Initial Start of Device (Initial Start) Device, General OUT on * * LED BO 160 5 1 No
67 Resume (Resume) Device, General OUT on * * LED BO
68 Clock Synchronization Error
(Clock SyncError)
Device, General OUT on
off
**LEDBO
69 Daylight Saving Time (DayLight-
SavTime)
Device, General OUT on
off
**LEDBO
70 Setting calculation is running
(Settings Calc.)
Device, General OUT on
off
* * LED BO 160 22 1 Yes
71 Settings Check (Settings Check) Device, General OUT * * * LED BO
72 Level-2 change (Level-2 change) Device, General OUT on
off
**LEDBO
73 Local setting change (Local
change)
Device, General OUT * * *
110 Event lost (Event Lost) Device, General OUT_
Ev
on * LED BO 135 130 1 No
113 Flag Lost (Flag Lost) Device, General OUT on * m LED BO 135 136 1 Yes
125 Chatter ON (Chatter ON) Device, General OUT on
off
* * LED BO 135 145 1 Yes
140 Error with a summary alarm
(Error Sum Alarm)
Device, General OUT on
off
* * LED BO 160 47 1 Yes
144 Error 5V (Error 5V) Device, General OUT on
off
**LEDBO
145 Error 0V (Error 0V) Device, General OUT on
off
**LEDBO
146 Error -5V (Error -5V) Device, General OUT on
off
**LEDBO
No. Description Function Type
of In-
for-
matio
n
Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log ON/OFF
Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF
Ground Fault Log ON/OFF
Marked in Oscill. Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
Information Number
Data Unit
General Interrogation
A.9 Information List
223
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
147 Error Power Supply (Error Pwr-
Supply)
Device, General OUT on
off
**LEDBO
160 Alarm Summary Event (Alarm
Sum Event)
Device, General OUT on
off
* * LED BO 160 46 1 Yes
161 Failure: General Current Supervi-
sion (Fail I Superv.)
Measurem.Superv OUT on
off
* * LED BO 160 32 1 Yes
162 Failure: Current Summation (Fail-
ure Σ I)
Measurem.Superv OUT on
off
* * LED BO 135 182 1 Yes
163 Failure: Current Balance (Fail I
balance)
Measurem.Superv OUT on
off
* * LED BO 135 183 1 Yes
167 Failure: Voltage Balance (Fail V
balance)
Measurem.Superv OUT on
off
* * LED BO 135 186 1 Yes
170 VT Fuse Failure (alarm instanta-
neous) (VT FuseFail)
Measurem.Superv OUT on
off
**LEDBO
171 Failure: Phase Sequence (Fail
Ph. Seq.)
Measurem.Superv OUT on
off
* * LED BO 160 35 1 Yes
175 Failure: Phase Sequence Current
(Fail Ph. Seq. I)
Measurem.Superv OUT on
off
* * LED BO 135 191 1 Yes
176 Failure: Phase Sequence Voltage
(Fail Ph. Seq. V)
Measurem.Superv OUT on
off
* * LED BO 135 192 1 Yes
177 Failure: Battery empty (Fail Bat-
tery)
Device, General OUT on
off
**LEDBO
178 I/O-Board Error (I/O-Board error) Device, General OUT on
off
**LEDBO
183 Error Board 1 (Error Board 1) Device, General OUT on
off
**LEDBO
184 Error Board 2 (Error Board 2) Device, General OUT on
off
**LEDBO
185 Error Board 3 (Error Board 3) Device, General OUT on
off
**LEDBO
186 Error Board 4 (Error Board 4) Device, General OUT on
off
**LEDBO
187 Error Board 5 (Error Board 5) Device, General OUT on
off
**LEDBO
188 Error Board 6 (Error Board 6) Device, General OUT on
off
**LEDBO
189 Error Board 7 (Error Board 7) Device, General OUT on
off
**LEDBO
191 Error: Offset (Error Offset) Device, General OUT on
off
**LEDBO
192 Error:1A/5Ajumper different from
setting (Error1A/5Awrong)
Device, General OUT on
off
*
193 Alarm: NO calibration data avail-
able (Alarm NO calibr)
Device, General OUT on
off
**LEDBO
197 Measurement Supervision is
switched OFF (MeasSup OFF)
Measurem.Superv OUT on
off
* * LED BO 135 197 1 Yes
220 Error: Range CT Ph wrong (CT
Ph wrong)
Device, General OUT on
off
*
236.2127 - (-) Device, General IntSP on
off
* * * LED BO
264 Failure: RTD-Box 1 (Fail: RTD-
Box 1)
RTD-Box OUT ON
OFF
**LEDBO
267 Failure: RTD-Box 2 (Fail: RTD-
Box 2)
RTD-Box OUT ON
OFF
**LEDBO
268 Supervision Pressure (Su-
perv.Pressure)
Measurement OUT on
off
* LED BO
No. Description Function Type
of In-
for-
matio
n
Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log ON/OFF
Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF
Ground Fault Log ON/OFF
Marked in Oscill. Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
Information Number
Data Unit
General Interrogation
A Appendix
224 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
269 Supervision Temperature (Su-
perv.Temp.)
Measurement OUT on
off
* LED BO
270 Set Point Pressure< (SP. Pres-
sure<)
Set Points(MV) OUT on
off
* LED BO
271 Set Point Temp> (SP. Temp>) Set Points(MV) OUT on
off
* LED BO
272 Set Point Operating Hours (SP.
Op Hours>)
SetPoint(Stat) OUT on
off
* LED BO 135 229 1 Yes
273 Set Point Phase A dmd> (SP. I A
dmd>)
Set Points(MV) OUT on
off
* LED BO 135 230 1 Yes
274 Set Point Phase B dmd> (SP. I B
dmd>)
Set Points(MV) OUT on
off
* LED BO 135 234 1 Yes
275 Set Point Phase C dmd> (SP. I C
dmd>)
Set Points(MV) OUT on
off
* LED BO 135 235 1 Yes
276 Set Point positive sequence
I1dmd> (SP. I1dmd>)
Set Points(MV) OUT on
off
* LED BO 135 236 1 Yes
277 Set Point |Pdmd|> (SP. |Pdmd|>) Set Points(MV) OUT on
off
* LED BO 135 237 1 Yes
278 Set Point |Qdmd|> (SP. |Qdmd|>) Set Points(MV) OUT on
off
* LED BO 135 238 1 Yes
279 Set Point |Sdmd|> (SP. |Sdmd|>) Set Points(MV) OUT on
off
* LED BO 135 239 1 Yes
284 Set Point 37-1 Undercurrent
alarm (SP. 37-1 alarm)
Set Points(MV) OUT on
off
* LED BO 135 244 1 Yes
285 Set Point 55 Power factor alarm
(SP. PF(55)alarm)
Set Points(MV) OUT on
off
* LED BO 135 245 1 Yes
320 Warn: Limit of Memory Data ex-
ceeded (Warn Mem. Data)
Device, General OUT on
off
**LEDBO
321 Warn: Limit of Memory Parameter
exceeded (Warn Mem. Para.)
Device, General OUT on
off
**LEDBO
322 Warn: Limit of Memory Operation
exceeded (Warn Mem. Oper.)
Device, General OUT on
off
**LEDBO
323 Warn: Limit of Memory New ex-
ceeded (Warn Mem. New)
Device, General OUT on
off
**LEDBO
395 >I MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>I
MinMax Reset)
Min/Max meter SP ON * BI BO
396 >I1 MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>I1
MiMaReset)
Min/Max meter SP ON * BI BO
397 >V MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>V
MiMaReset)
Min/Max meter SP ON * BI BO
398 >Vphph MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
(>VphphMiMaRes)
Min/Max meter SP ON * BI BO
399 >V1 MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>V1
MiMa Reset)
Min/Max meter SP ON * BI BO
400 >P MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>P
MiMa Reset)
Min/Max meter SP ON * BI BO
401 >S MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>S
MiMa Reset)
Min/Max meter SP ON * BI BO
402 >Q MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>Q
MiMa Reset)
Min/Max meter SP ON * BI BO
403 >Idmd MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
(>Idmd MiMaReset)
Min/Max meter SP ON * BI BO
404 >Pdmd MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
(>Pdmd MiMaReset)
Min/Max meter SP ON * BI BO
405 >Qdmd MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
(>Qdmd MiMaReset)
Min/Max meter SP ON * BI BO
No. Description Function Type
of In-
for-
matio
n
Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log ON/OFF
Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF
Ground Fault Log ON/OFF
Marked in Oscill. Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
Information Number
Data Unit
General Interrogation
A.9 Information List
225
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
406 >Sdmd MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
(>Sdmd MiMaReset)
Min/Max meter SP ON * BI BO
407 >Frq. MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
(>Frq MiMa Reset)
Min/Max meter SP ON * BI BO
408 >Power Factor MIN/MAX Buffer
Reset (>PF MiMaReset)
Min/Max meter SP ON * BI BO
409 >BLOCK Op Counter (>BLOCK
Op Count)
Statistics SP on
off
* LED BI BO
1020 Counter of operating hours
(Op.Hours=)
Statistics VI
5145 >Reverse Phase Rotation (>Re-
verse Rot.)
P.System Data 1 SP on
off
**LEDBIBO
5147 Phase rotation ABC (Rotation
ABC)
P.System Data 1 OUT on
off
* * LED BO 70 128 1 Yes
5148 Phase rotation ACB (Rotation
ACB)
P.System Data 1 OUT on
off
* * LED BO 70 129 1 Yes
6509 >Failure: Feeder VT
(>FAIL:FEEDER VT)
Measurem.Superv SP on
off
* * LED BI BO 74 9 1 Yes
6510 >Failure: Busbar VT (>FAIL: BUS
VT)
Measurem.Superv SP on
off
**LEDBIBO74101Yes
14101 Fail: RTD (broken wire/shorted)
(Fail: RTD)
RTD-Box OUT ON
OFF
**LEDBO
14111 Fail: RTD 1 (broken wire/shorted)
(Fail: RTD 1)
RTD-Box OUT ON
OFF
**LEDBO
14112 RTD 1 Temperature stage 1
picked up (RTD 1 St.1 p.up)
RTD-Box OUT ON
OFF
**LEDBO
14113 RTD 1 Temperature stage 2
picked up (RTD 1 St.2 p.up)
RTD-Box OUT ON
OFF
**LEDBO
14121 Fail: RTD 2 (broken wire/shorted)
(Fail: RTD 2)
RTD-Box OUT ON
OFF
**LEDBO
14122 RTD 2 Temperature stage 1
picked up (RTD 2 St.1 p.up)
RTD-Box OUT ON
OFF
**LEDBO
14123 RTD 2 Temperature stage 2
picked up (RTD 2 St.2 p.up)
RTD-Box OUT ON
OFF
**LEDBO
14131 Fail: RTD 3 (broken wire/shorted)
(Fail: RTD 3)
RTD-Box OUT ON
OFF
**LEDBO
14132 RTD 3 Temperature stage 1
picked up (RTD 3 St.1 p.up)
RTD-Box OUT ON
OFF
**LEDBO
14133 RTD 3 Temperature stage 2
picked up (RTD 3 St.2 p.up)
RTD-Box OUT ON
OFF
**LEDBO
14141 Fail: RTD 4 (broken wire/shorted)
(Fail: RTD 4)
RTD-Box OUT ON
OFF
**LEDBO
14142 RTD 4 Temperature stage 1
picked up (RTD 4 St.1 p.up)
RTD-Box OUT ON
OFF
**LEDBO
14143 RTD 4 Temperature stage 2
picked up (RTD 4 St.2 p.up)
RTD-Box OUT ON
OFF
**LEDBO
14151 Fail: RTD 5 (broken wire/shorted)
(Fail: RTD 5)
RTD-Box OUT ON
OFF
**LEDBO
14152 RTD 5 Temperature stage 1
picked up (RTD 5 St.1 p.up)
RTD-Box OUT ON
OFF
**LEDBO
14153 RTD 5 Temperature stage 2
picked up (RTD 5 St.2 p.up)
RTD-Box OUT ON
OFF
**LEDBO
14161 Fail: RTD 6 (broken wire/shorted)
(Fail: RTD 6)
RTD-Box OUT ON
OFF
**LEDBO
14162 RTD 6 Temperature stage 1
picked up (RTD 6 St.1 p.up)
RTD-Box OUT ON
OFF
**LEDBO
No. Description Function Type
of In-
for-
matio
n
Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log ON/OFF
Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF
Ground Fault Log ON/OFF
Marked in Oscill. Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
Information Number
Data Unit
General Interrogation
A Appendix
226 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
14163 RTD 6 Temperature stage 2
picked up (RTD 6 St.2 p.up)
RTD-Box OUT ON
OFF
**LEDBO
14171 Fail: RTD 7 (broken wire/shorted)
(Fail: RTD 7)
RTD-Box OUT ON
OFF
**LEDBO
14172 RTD 7 Temperature stage 1
picked up (RTD 7 St.1 p.up)
RTD-Box OUT ON
OFF
**LEDBO
14173 RTD 7 Temperature stage 2
picked up (RTD 7 St.2 p.up)
RTD-Box OUT ON
OFF
**LEDBO
14181 Fail: RTD 8 (broken wire/shorted)
(Fail: RTD 8)
RTD-Box OUT ON
OFF
**LEDBO
14182 RTD 8 Temperature stage 1
picked up (RTD 8 St.1 p.up)
RTD-Box OUT ON
OFF
**LEDBO
14183 RTD 8 Temperature stage 2
picked up (RTD 8 St.2 p.up)
RTD-Box OUT ON
OFF
**LEDBO
14191 Fail: RTD 9 (broken wire/shorted)
(Fail: RTD 9)
RTD-Box OUT ON
OFF
**LEDBO
14192 RTD 9 Temperature stage 1
picked up (RTD 9 St.1 p.up)
RTD-Box OUT ON
OFF
**LEDBO
14193 RTD 9 Temperature stage 2
picked up (RTD 9 St.2 p.up)
RTD-Box OUT ON
OFF
**LEDBO
14201 Fail: RTD10 (broken wire/short-
ed) (Fail: RTD10)
RTD-Box OUT ON
OFF
**LEDBO
14202 RTD10 Temperature stage 1
picked up (RTD10 St.1 p.up)
RTD-Box OUT ON
OFF
**LEDBO
14203 RTD10 Temperature stage 2
picked up (RTD10 St.2 p.up)
RTD-Box OUT ON
OFF
**LEDBO
14211 Fail: RTD11 (broken wire/short-
ed) (Fail: RTD11)
RTD-Box OUT ON
OFF
**LEDBO
14212 RTD11 Temperature stage 1
picked up (RTD11 St.1 p.up)
RTD-Box OUT ON
OFF
**LEDBO
14213 RTD11 Temperature stage 2
picked up (RTD11 St.2 p.up)
RTD-Box OUT ON
OFF
**LEDBO
14221 Fail: RTD12 (broken wire/short-
ed) (Fail: RTD12)
RTD-Box OUT ON
OFF
**LEDBO
14222 RTD12 Temperature stage 1
picked up (RTD12 St.1 p.up)
RTD-Box OUT ON
OFF
**LEDBO
14223 RTD12 Temperature stage 2
picked up (RTD12 St.2 p.up)
RTD-Box OUT ON
OFF
**LEDBO
16019 - (-) P.System Data 2 SP on
off
**LEDBIBO
No. Description Function Type
of In-
for-
matio
n
Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log ON/OFF
Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF
Ground Fault Log ON/OFF
Marked in Oscill. Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
Information Number
Data Unit
General Interrogation
A.10 Group Alarms
227
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
A.10 Group Alarms
No. Description Function No. Description
140 Error Sum Alarm 144
145
146
147
177
178
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
Error 5V
Error 0V
Error -5V
Error PwrSupply
Fail Battery
I/O-Board error
Error Board 1
Error Board 2
Error Board 3
Error Board 4
Error Board 5
Error Board 6
Error Board 7
160 Alarm Sum Event 162
163
167
171
175
176
191
Failure Σ I
Fail I balance
Fail V balance
Fail Ph. Seq.
Fail Ph. Seq. I
Fail Ph. Seq. V
Error Offset
161 Fail I Superv. 162
163
Failure Σ I
Fail I balance
A Appendix
228 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
A.11 Measured Values
No. Description Function IEC 60870-5-103 Configurable in Matrix
Type
Information Number
Compatibility
Data Unit
Position
CFC
Control Display
Default Display
- I A dmd> (I Admd>) Set Points(MV) - - - - - CFC CD DD
- I B dmd> (I Bdmd>) Set Points(MV) - - - - - CFC CD DD
- I C dmd> (I Cdmd>) Set Points(MV) - - - - - CFC CD DD
- I1dmd> (I1dmd>) Set Points(MV) - - - - - CFC CD DD
- |Pdmd|> (|Pdmd|>) Set Points(MV) - - - - - CFC CD DD
- |Qdmd|> (|Qdmd|>) Set Points(MV) - - - - - CFC CD DD
- |Sdmd|> (|Sdmd|>) Set Points(MV) - - - - - CFC CD DD
- Pressure< (Press<) Set Points(MV) - - - - - CFC CD DD
- Temp> (Temp>) Set Points(MV) - - - - - CFC CD DD
- 37-1 under current (37-1) Set Points(MV) - - - - - CFC CD DD
- |Power Factor|< (|PF|<) Set Points(MV) - - - - - CFC CD DD
- Number of TRIPs= (#of TRIPs=) Statistics - - - - - CFC CD DD
- Operating hours greater than (OpHour>) SetPoint(Stat) - - - - - CFC CD DD
601 Ia (Ia =) Measurement 240 148 Yes 9 1 CFC CD DD
134 137 No 9 1
602 Ib (Ib =) Measurement 240 148 Yes 9 2 CFC CD DD
134 137 No 9 2
603 Ic (Ic =) Measurement 240 148 Yes 9 3 CFC CD DD
134 137 No 9 3
604 In (In =) Measurement 240 147 Yes 3 1 CFC CD DD
134 137 No 9 4
605 I1 (positive sequence) (I1 =) Measurement - - - - - CFC CD DD
606 I2 (negative sequence) (I2 =) Measurement - - - - - CFC CD DD
621 Va (Va =) Measurement 240 148 Yes 9 4 CFC CD DD
134 137 No 9 5
622 Vb (Vb =) Measurement 240 148 Yes 9 5 CFC CD DD
134 137 No 9 6
623 Vc (Vc =) Measurement 240 148 Yes 9 6 CFC CD DD
134 137 No 9 7
624 Va-b (Va-b=) Measurement 134 137 No 9 8 CFC CD DD
625 Vb-c (Vb-c=) Measurement 134 137 No 9 9 CFC CD DD
626 Vc-a (Vc-a=) Measurement 134 137 No 9 10 CFC CD DD
627 VN (VN =) Measurement 240 147 Yes 3 2 CFC CD DD
629 V1 (positive sequence) (V1 =) Measurement - - - - - CFC CD DD
630 V2 (negative sequence) (V2 =) Measurement - - - - - CFC CD DD
641 P (active power) (P =) Measurement 240 148 Yes 9 7 CFC CD DD
134 137 No 9 11
642 Q (reactive power) (Q =) Measurement 134 137 No 9 12 CFC CD DD
644 Frequency (Freq=) Measurement 134 137 No 9 13 CFC CD DD
645 S (apparent power) (S =) Measurement - - - - - CFC CD DD
831 3Io (zero sequence) (3Io =) Measurement - - - - - CFC CD DD
832 Vo (zero sequence) (Vo =) Measurement - - - - - CFC CD DD
833 I1 (positive sequence) Demand (I1 dmd=) Demand meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
834 Active Power Demand (P dmd =) Demand meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
A.11 Measured Values
229
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
835 Reactive Power Demand (Q dmd =) Demand meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
836 Apparent Power Demand (S dmd =) Demand meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
837 I A Demand Minimum (IAdmdMin) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
838 I A Demand Maximum (IAdmdMax) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
839 I B Demand Minimum (IBdmdMin) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
840 I B Demand Maximum (IBdmdMax) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
841 I C Demand Minimum (ICdmdMin) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
842 I C Demand Maximum (ICdmdMax) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
843 I1 (positive sequence) Demand Minimum
(I1dmdMin)
Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
844 I1 (positive sequence) Demand Maximum
(I1dmdMax)
Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
845 Active Power Demand Minimum (PdMin=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
846 Active Power Demand Maximum (PdMax=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
847 Reactive Power Minimum (QdMin=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
848 Reactive Power Maximum (QdMax=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
849 Apparent Power Minimum (SdMin=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
850 Apparent Power Maximum (SdMax=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
851 Ia Min (Ia Min=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
852 Ia Max (Ia Max=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
853 Ib Min (Ib Min=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
854 Ib Max (Ib Max=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
855 Ic Min (Ic Min=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
856 Ic Max (Ic Max=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
857 I1 (positive sequence) Minimum (I1 Min=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
858 I1 (positive sequence) Maximum (I1 Max=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
859 Va-n Min (Va-nMin=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
860 Va-n Max (Va-nMax=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
861 Vb-n Min (Vb-nMin=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
862 Vb-n Max (Vb-nMax=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
863 Vc-n Min (Vc-nMin=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
864 Vc-n Max (Vc-nMax=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
865 Va-b Min (Va-bMin=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
867 Va-b Max (Va-bMax=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
868 Vb-c Min (Vb-cMin=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
869 Vb-c Max (Vb-cMax=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
870 Vc-a Min (Vc-aMin=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
871 Vc-a Max (Vc-aMax=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
872 V neutral Min (Vn Min =) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
873 V neutral Max (Vn Max =) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
874 V1 (positive sequence) Voltage Minimum (V1
Min =)
Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
875 V1 (positive sequence) Voltage Maximum
(V1 Max =)
Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
876 Active Power Minimum (Pmin=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
877 Active Power Maximum (Pmax=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
878 Reactive Power Minimum (Qmin=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
879 Reactive Power Maximum (Qmax=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
880 Apparent Power Minimum (Smin=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
881 Apparent Power Maximum (Smax=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
No. Description Function IEC 60870-5-103 Configurable in Matrix
Type
Information Number
Compatibility
Data Unit
Position
CFC
Control Display
Default Display
A Appendix
230 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
■
882 Frequency Minimum (fmin=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
883 Frequency Maximum (fmax=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
884 Power Factor Maximum (PF Max=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
885 Power Factor Minimum (PF Min=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
888 Pulsed Energy Wp (active) (Wp(puls)) Energy 133 55 No 205 - CFC CD DD
889 Pulsed Energy Wq (reactive) (Wq(puls)) Energy 133 56 No 205 - CFC CD DD
901 Power Factor (PF =) Measurement 134 137 No 9 14 CFC CD DD
924 Wp Forward (WpForward) Energy 133 51 No 205 - CFC CD DD
925 Wq Forward (WqForward) Energy 133 52 No 205 - CFC CD DD
928 Wp Reverse (WpReverse) Energy 133 53 No 205 - CFC CD DD
929 Wq Reverse (WqReverse) Energy 133 54 No 205 - CFC CD DD
963 I A demand (Ia dmd=) Demand meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
964 I B demand (Ib dmd=) Demand meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
965 I C demand (Ic dmd=) Demand meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
991 Pressure (Press =) Measurement - - - - - CFC CD DD
992 Temperature (Temp =) Measurement - - - - - CFC CD DD
996 Transducer 1 (Td1=) Measurement 134 136 No 9 1 CFC CD DD
997 Transducer 2 (Td2=) Measurement 134 136 No 9 2 CFC CD DD
1068 Temperature of RTD 1 (Θ RTD 1 =) Measurement 134 146 No 9 1 CFC CD DD
1069 Temperature of RTD 2 (Θ RTD 2 =) Measurement 134 146 No 9 2 CFC CD DD
1070 Temperature of RTD 3 (Θ RTD 3 =) Measurement 134 146 No 9 3 CFC CD DD
1071 Temperature of RTD 4 (Θ RTD 4 =) Measurement 134 146 No 9 4 CFC CD DD
1072 Temperature of RTD 5 (Θ RTD 5 =) Measurement 134 146 No 9 5 CFC CD DD
1073 Temperature of RTD 6 (Θ RTD 6 =) Measurement 134 146 No 9 6 CFC CD DD
1074 Temperature of RTD 7 (Θ RTD 7 =) Measurement 134 146 No 9 7 CFC CD DD
1075 Temperature of RTD 8 (Θ RTD 8 =) Measurement 134 146 No 9 8 CFC CD DD
1076 Temperature of RTD 9 (Θ RTD 9 =) Measurement 134 146 No 9 9 CFC CD DD
1077 Temperature of RTD10 (Θ RTD10 =) Measurement 134 146 No 9 10 CFC CD DD
1078 Temperature of RTD11 (Θ RTD11 =) Measurement 134 146 No 9 11 CFC CD DD
1079 Temperature of RTD12 (Θ RTD12 =) Measurement 134 146 No 9 12 CFC CD DD
No. Description Function IEC 60870-5-103 Configurable in Matrix
Type
Information Number
Compatibility
Data Unit
Position
CFC
Control Display
Default Display
2316MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Literature
/1/ SIPROTEC 4 System Description; E50417-H1176-C151-A5
/2/ SIPROTEC DIGSI, Start UP; E50417-G1176-C152-A2
/3/ DIGSI CFC, Manual; E50417-H1176-C098-A5
/4/ SIPROTEC SIGRA 4, Manual; E50417-H1176-C070-A3
Literature
232 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
2336MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Glossary
Battery The buffer battery ensures that specified data areas, flags, timers and counters are re-
tained retentively.
Bay controllers Bay controllers are devices with control and monitoring functions without protective
functions.
Bit pattern indica-
tion
Bit pattern indication is a processing function by means of which items of digital
process information applying across several inputs can be detected together in paral-
lel and processed further. The bit pattern length can be specified as 1, 2, 3 or 4 bytes.
BP_xx → Bit pattern indication (Bitstring Of x Bit), x designates the length in bits (8, 16, 24 or
32 bits).
C_xx Command without feedback
CF_xx Command with feedback
CFC Continuous Function Chart. CFC is a graphics editor with which a program can be
created and configured by using ready-made blocks.
CFC blocks Blocks are parts of the user program delimited by their function, their structure or their
purpose.
Chatter blocking A rapidly intermittent input (for example, due to a relay contact fault) is switched off
after a configurable monitoring time and can thus not generate any further signal
changes. The function prevents overloading of the system when a fault arises.
Combination
devices
Combination devices are bay devices with protection functions and a control display.
Combination matrix DIGSI V4.6 and higher allows up to 32 compatible SIPROTEC 4 devices to communi-
cate with each other in an inter-relay communication network (IRC). The combination
matrix defines which devices exchange which information.
Communication
branch
A communications branch corresponds to the configuration of 1 to n users which com-
municate by means of a common bus.
Communication
reference CR
The communication reference describes the type and version of a station in commu-
nication by PROFIBUS.
Glossary
234 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Component view In addition to a topological view, SIMATIC Manager offers you a component view. The
component view does not offer any overview of the hierarchy of a project. It does, how-
ever, provide an overview of all the SIPROTEC 4 devices within a project.
COMTRADE Common Format for Transient Data Exchange, format for fault records.
Container If an object can contain other objects, it is called a container. The object Folder is an
example of such a container.
Control display The display which is displayed on devices with a large (graphic) display after you have
pressed the control key is called the control display. It contains the switchgear that can
be controlled in the feeder with status display. It is used to perform switching opera-
tions. Defining this diagram is part of the configuration.
Data pane → The right-hand area of the project window displays the contents of the area selected
in the → navigation window, for example indications, measured values, etc. of the in-
formation lists or the function selection for the device configuration.
DCF77 The extremely precise official time is determined in Germany by the "Physikalisch-
Technischen-Bundesanstalt PTB" in Braunschweig. The atomic clock unit of the PTB
transmits this time via the long-wave time-signal transmitter in Mainflingen near Frank-
furt/Main. The emitted time signal can be received within a radius of approx. 1,500 km
from Frankfurt/Main.
Device container In the Component View, all SIPROTEC 4 devices are assigned to an object of type
Device container. This object is a special object of DIGSI Manager. However, since
there is no component view in DIGSI Manager, this object only becomes visible in con-
junction with STEP 7.
Double command Double commands are process outputs which indicate 4 process states at 2 outputs:
2 defined (for example ON/OFF) and 2 undefined states (for example intermediate po-
sitions)
Double-point indi-
cation
Double-point indications are items of process information which indicate 4 process
states at 2 inputs: 2 defined (for example ON/OFF) and 2 undefined states (for
example intermediate positions).
DP → Double-point indication
DP_I → Double point indication, intermediate position 00
Drag-and-drop Copying, moving and linking function, used at graphics user interfaces. Objects are
selected with the mouse, held and moved from one data area to another.
Electromagnetic
compatibility
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) is the ability of an electrical apparatus to function
fault-free in a specified environment without influencing the environment unduly.
EMC → Electromagnetic compatibility
Glossary
235
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
ESD protection ESD protection is the total of all the means and measures used to protect electrostatic
sensitive devices.
ExBPxx External bit pattern indication via an ETHERNET connection, device-specific → Bit
pattern indication
ExC External command without feedback via an ETHERNET connection, device-specific
ExCF External command with feedback via an ETHERNET connection, device-specific
ExDP External double point indication via an ETHERNET connection, device-specific →
Double-point indication
ExDP_I External double point indication via an ETHERNET connection, intermediate position
00, device-specific → Double-point indication
ExMV External metered value via an ETHERNET connection, device-specific
ExSI External single point indication via an ETHERNET connection, device-specific →
Single point indication
ExSI_F External single point indication via an ETHERNET connection, device-specific →
Transient information, → Single point indication
Field devices Generic term for all devices assigned to the field level: Protection devices, combina-
tion devices, bay controllers.
Floating → Without electrical connection to the → ground.
FMS communica-
tion branch
Within an FMS communication branch the users communicate on the basis of the
PROFIBUS FMS protocol via a PROFIBUS FMS network.
Folder This object type is used to create the hierarchical structure of a project.
General interroga-
tion (GI)
During the system start-up the state of all the process inputs, of the status and of the
fault image is sampled. This information is used to update the system-end process
image. The current process state can also be sampled after a data loss by means of
a GI.
GPS Global Positioning System. Satellites with atomic clocks on board orbit the earth twice
a day in different parts in approx. 20,000 km. They transmit signals which also contain
the GPS universal time. The GPS receiver determines its own position from the
signals received. From its position it can derive the running time of a satellite and thus
correct the transmitted GPS universal time.
Glossary
236 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
GOOSE message GOOSE messages (Generic Object Oriented Substation Event) according to IEC
61850 are data packets which are cyclic transferred event-controlled via the Ethernet
communication system. They serve for direct information exchange among the relays.
This mechanism implements cross-communication between bay units.
Ground The conductive ground whose electric potential can be set equal to zero at every point.
In the area of ground electrodes the ground can have a potential deviating from zero.
The term "Ground reference plane" is often used for this state.
Grounding Grounding means that a conductive part is to connect via an grounding system to the
→ ground.
Grounding Grounding is the total of all means and measured used for grounding.
Hierarchy level Within a structure with higher-level and lower-level objects a hierarchy level is a con-
tainer of equivalent objects.
HV field description The HV project description file contains details of fields which exist in a ModPara-
project. The actual field information of each field is memorized in a HV field description
file. Within the HV project description file, each field is allocated such a HV field de-
scription file by a reference to the file name.
HV project descrip-
tion
All the data is exported once the configuration and parameterisation of PCUs and sub-
modules using ModPara has been completed. This data is split up into several files.
One file contains details about the fundamental project structure. This also includes,
for example, information detailing which fields exist in this project. This file is called a
HV project description file.
ID Internal double point indication → Double-point indication
ID_S Internal double point indication intermediate position 00, → Double-point indication
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IEC address Within an IEC bus a unique IEC address has to be assigned to each SIPROTEC 4
device. A total of 254 IEC addresses are available for each IEC bus.
IEC communication
branch
Within an IEC communication branch the users communicate on the basis of the
IEC60-870-5-103 protocol via an IEC bus.
Initialization string An initialization string comprises a range of modem-specific commands. These are
transmitted to the modem within the framework of modem initialization. The com-
mands can, for example, force specific settings for the modem.
Inter relay commu-
nication
→ IRC combination
Glossary
237
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
IRC combination Inter Relay Communication, IRC, is used for directly exchanging process information
between SIPROTEC 4 devices. You require an object of type IRC combination to con-
figure an Inter Relay Communication. Each user of the combination and all the neces-
sary communication parameters are defined in this object. The type and scope of the
information exchanged among the users is also stored in this object.
IRIG-B Time signal code of the Inter-Range Instrumentation Group
IS Internal single point indication → Single point indication
IS_F Single-point indication fleeting → Transient information, → Single point indication
ISO 9001 The ISO 9000 ff range of standards defines measures used to ensure the quality of a
product from the development stage to the manufacturing stage.
Link address The link address gives the address of a V3/V2 device.
List view The right pane of the project window displays the names and icons of objects which
represent the contents of a container selected in the tree view. Because they are dis-
played in the form of a list, this area is called the list view.
LV Limit value
LVU Limit value, user-defined
Master Masters may send data to other users and request data from other users. DIGSI op-
erates as a master.
Metered value Metered values are a processing function with which the total number of discrete
similar events (counting pulses) is determined for a period, usually as an integrated
value. In power supply companies the electrical work is usually recorded as a metered
value (energy purchase/supply, energy transportation).
MLFB number MLFB is the abbreviation for "MaschinenLesbare FabrikateBezeichnung" (machine-
readable product designation). This is the equivalent of an order number. The type
and version of a SIPROTEC 4 device are coded in the order number.
Modem connection This object type contains information on both partners of a modem connection, the
local modem and the remote modem.
Modem profile A modem profile consists of the name of the profile, a modem driver and may also
comprise several initialization commands and a user address. You can create several
modem profiles for one physical modem. To do so you need to link various initialization
commands or user addresses to a modem driver and its properties and save them
under different names.
Modems Modem profiles for a modem connection are saved in this object type.
Glossary
238 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
MV Measured value
MVMV Metered value which is formed from the measured value
MVT Measured value with time
MVU Measured value, user-defined
Navigation pane The left pane of the project window displays the names and symbols of all containers
of a project in the form of a folder tree.
Object Each element of a project structure is called an object in DIGSI.
Object properties Each object has properties. These might be general properties that are common to
several objects. An object can also have specific properties.
Off-line In Off-line mode a link with the SIPROTEC 4 device is not necessary. You work with
data which are stored in files.
OI_F Output indication fleeting → Transient information
On-line When working in On-line mode, there is a physical link to a SIPROTEC 4 device which
can be implemented in various ways. This link can be implemented as a direct con-
nection, as a modem connection or as a PROFIBUS FMS connection.
OUT Output indication
Parameter set The parameter set is the set of all parameters that can be set for a SIPROTEC 4
device.
Phone book User addresses for a modem connection are saved in this object type.
PMV Pulse metered value
Process bus It is possible a direct communication with the SICAM HV-modules with devices featur-
ing a process bus interface. The process bus interface is equipped with an Ethernet
module.
PROFIBUS PROcess FIeld BUS, the German process and field bus standard, as specified in the
standard EN 50170, Volume 2, PROFIBUS. It defines the functional, electrical, and
mechanical properties for a bit-serial field bus.
PROFIBUS address Within a PROFIBUS network a unique PROFIBUS address has to be assigned to
each SIPROTEC 4 device. A total of 254 PROFIBUS addresses are available for each
PROFIBUS network.
Glossary
239
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Project Content-wise, a project is the image of a real power supply system. Graphically, a
project is represented by a number of objects which are integrated in a hierarchical
structure. Physically, a project consists of a series of folders and files containing
project data.
Protection devices All devices with a protective function and no control display.
Reorganizing Frequent addition and deletion of objects gives rise to memory areas that can no
longer be used. By cleaning up projects, you can release these memory areas again.
However, a clean up also reassigns the VD addresses. The consequence of that is
that all SIPROTEC 4 devices have to be reinitialised.
RIO file Relay data Interchange format by Omicron.
RSxxx-interface Serial interfaces RS232, RS422/485
SCADA Interface Rear serial interface on the devices for connecting to a control system via IEC or
PROFIBUS.
Service port Rear serial interface on the devices for connecting DIGSI (for example, via modem).
Setting parameters General term for all adjustments made to the device. Parameterization jobs are exe-
cuted by means of DIGSI or, in some cases, directly on the device.
SI → Single point indication
SI_F → Single-point indication fleeting → Transient information, → Single point indication
SICAM SAS Modularly structured station control system, based on the substation controller →
SICAM SC and the SICAM WinCC operator control and monitoring system.
SICAM SC Substation Controller. Modularly structured substation control system, based on the
SIMATIC M7 automation system.
SICAM WinCC The SICAM WinCC operator control and monitoring system displays the state of your
network graphically, visualizes alarms, interrupts and indications, archives the
network data, offers the possibility of intervening manually in the process and
manages the system rights of the individual employee.
Single command Single commands are process outputs which indicate 2 process states (for example,
ON/OFF) at one output.
Single point indica-
tion
Single indications are items of process information which indicate 2 process states (for
example, ON/OFF) at one output.
SIPROTEC The registered trademark SIPROTEC is used for devices implemented on system
base V4.
Glossary
240 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
SIPROTEC 4 device This object type represents a real SIPROTEC 4 device with all the setting values and
process data it contains.
SIPROTEC 4
variant
This object type represents a variant of an object of type SIPROTEC 4 device. The
device data of this variant may well differ from the device data of the source object.
However, all variants derived from the source object have the same VD address as
the source object. For this reason they always correspond to the same real SIPRO-
TEC 4 device as the source object. Objects of type SIPROTEC 4 variant have a variety
of uses, such as documenting different operating states when entering parameter set-
tings of a SIPROTEC 4 device.
Slave A slave may only exchange data with a master after being prompted to do so by the
master. SIPROTEC 4 devices operate as slaves.
Time stamp Time stamp is the assignment of the real time to a process event.
Topological view DIGSI Manager always displays a project in the topological view. This shows the hier-
archical structure of a project with all available objects.
Transformer Tap In-
dication
Transformer tap indication is a processing function on the DI by means of which the
tap of the transformer tap changer can be detected together in parallel and processed
further.
Transient informa-
tion
A transient information is a brief transient → single-point indication at which only the
coming of the process signal is detected and processed immediately.
Tree view The left pane of the project window displays the names and symbols of all containers
of a project in the form of a folder tree. This area is called the tree view.
TxTap → Transformer Tap Indication
User address A user address comprises the name of the station, the national code, the area code
and the user-specific phone number.
Users DIGSI V4.6 and higher allows up to 32 compatible SIPROTEC 4 devices to communi-
cate with each other in an inter-relay communication network. The individual partici-
pating devices are called users.
VD A VD (Virtual Device) includes all communication objects and their properties and
states that are used by a communication user through services. A VD can be a phys-
ical device, a module of a device or a software module.
VD address The VD address is assigned automatically by DIGSI Manager. It exists only once in
the entire project and thus serves to identify unambiguously a real SIPROTEC 4
device. The VD address assigned by DIGSI Manager must be transferred to the
SIPROTEC 4 device in order to allow communication with DIGSI Device Editor.
VFD A VFD (Virtual Field Device) includes all communication objects and their properties
and states that are used by a communication user through services.
Index
241
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Index
A
Additional Functions 142
Alternating Voltage 125
Analog Inputs 124
Assignment of the D-subminiature connector 108
B
Bay Interlocking 54
Binary Inputs 126
Binary Outputs 126
Board Arrangement 84
Breaker Control 49, 136
Buffer Battery 28
Bus Address 92, 94
Bypassing Interlocks 60
C
Certifications 135
Changing the Nominal Current 81
Check: User-Defined Functions 118
Check: Voltage Transformer-Protective Switch 119
Checking: Binary Inputs and Outputs 115
Checking: Current and voltage connection 118
Checking: Data Connections 107
Checking: Operator Interface 107
Checking: Power Plant Connections 110
Checking: Service Interface 107
Checking: Switching Configured Operating
Devices 121
Checking: Temperature Measurement 120
Checking: Time Synchronization Interface 109
Checks: Phase Rotation 118
Climatic Stress Tests 134
Clock Time Synchronisation 146
Commissioning Startup Aids 145
Communication Interfaces 127
Connections 80
Construction 135
Control Voltage for Binary Inputs 81
CTS (Clear to Send) 97
Cubicle installation 161
Cubicle Mounting 102
Current balance monitoring 30
Current Inputs 124
Current sum monitoring 29
D
Declaration of Conformity 3
Device Satus Check 59
Dimensions: Cubicle Mounting 147
Dimensions: D-subminiature Connector Dongle
cable 153
Dimensions: Detached operator panel 152
Dimensions: Mounting with Detached Operator
Panel 150
Dimensions: Panel Flush Mounting 147
Dimensions: Panel Surface Mounting 149
Dimensions: Surface-mounting housing without op-
erator panel 150
Direct Voltage 125
Direction Test with Load Current 119
Disassembly of the Device 83
DNP3.0 98
Dongle cable 105
Double Activation Blockage 59
E
Electrical Tests 131
EMC Tests for Immunity (Type Tests) 132
EMC Tests for Noise Emission (Type Test) 132
EN100–module
Interface selection 27
Energy meter 144
Exchanging Interface Modules 95
Exchanging Interfaces 82
F
Field Interlocking 59
Final Preparation of the Device 122
Function Modules 138
Functional Scope 22
G
General Diagrams 161
H
Hardware Monitoring 28
Humidity 134
Index
242 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
I
Input/output board B-I/O-1 91
Input/output board B-I/O-2 93
Insulation Test 131
Interlocked Switching 53
Invertable Measured Power Values 145
L
Life Status Contact 88, 90
Limit Value Monitoring 73
Limits for CFC blocks 139
Limits for User Defined Functions 139
Live Status Contact 81
Local Measured Values Monitoring 144
Long-Term Averages 143
M
Malfunction Responses of the Monitoring
Functions 35
Measured Value Monitoring 28, 33
Measured Values Monitoring 144
Measured Values Operational Measured Values 65
Measuring Transducer Inputs 124
Mechanical Stress Tests 133
Min / Max Report 143
Minimum and Maximum Values: 70
Modbus 98
Mounting with Detached Operator Panel 104
Mounting without Operator Panel 105
N
Nominal Frequency 23
Nominal Values of Transformers 24
Non-Interlocked Switching 53
O
Offset Monitoring 29
Operating Hours Counter 64, 145
Operational Measured Values 137, 142
Operator Interface 127
Optical Fibers 109
Ordering Information 156
Output Relays Binary Outputs 126
P
Panel Flush Mounting 100, 161
Panel Surface Mounting 103, 168
Panel Surface Mounting with Detached Operator
Panel 179
Panel Surface Mounting without Detached Operator
Panel 186
Phase Rotation Phase Sequence 47
Phase Rotation Reversal 23
Phase Sequence Supervision 32
Polarity of Current Transformers 23
Power Supply 125
Power Supply Voltage 81, 125
Power System Data 1 23, 23
Power System Data 2 26
Processing of Messages 62
Processing Temperatures 38
Processor board B–CPU 87
PROFIBUS DP 98
PROFIBUS FMS 98
R
Rack mounting 102
Reassembly of Device 99
RTD Boxes for Overload Detection 137
RTD-box (Resistance Temperature Detector) 109
RTD-Box 7XV56 38
S
Service Conditions 134
Service-/Modem Interface 128
Software Monitoring 29
Spare Parts 82
Specifications 131
Standard Interlocking 54
Statistics 145
Supply Voltage 81, 125
Switching Authority 57
Switching Mode 58
System Interface 129
System Interlocking 54
T
Temperature Detectors 137
Temperature Measurement RTD-Box 39
Temperature Unit 23
Temperatures 134
Terminal Assignment 161
Termination 82
Index
243 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
Termination of the Terminating Resistors 98
Test M o d e 113
Test: Direction 119
Test: System Interface 113
Thresholds for Indications 137
Time Stamping 144
Time Synchronization Interface 109, 131
Transformation Ratio 24
Transmission Block 113
U
User-Defined Functions 138
V
Vibration and Shock Stress During Steady Station-
ary Operation 133
Vibration and Shock Stress During Transport 133
Voltage balance monitoring 31
Voltage Connection 24
Voltage Inputs 124
W
Watchdog 29
Index
244 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-7
